US20230190834A1 - Immunomodulatory compositions comprising microbial entities - Google Patents

Immunomodulatory compositions comprising microbial entities Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20230190834A1
US20230190834A1 US17/816,932 US202217816932A US2023190834A1 US 20230190834 A1 US20230190834 A1 US 20230190834A1 US 202217816932 A US202217816932 A US 202217816932A US 2023190834 A1 US2023190834 A1 US 2023190834A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
microbial
composition
inflammatory
acid
cells
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US17/816,932
Inventor
Eric Michael Schott
Gerardo V. Toledo
Maria Juliana Soto-Giron
Alicia Eve Ballok
Ryan Green
Mark Charbonneau
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Solarea Bio Inc
Original Assignee
Solarea Bio Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Solarea Bio Inc filed Critical Solarea Bio Inc
Priority to US17/816,932 priority Critical patent/US20230190834A1/en
Assigned to SOLAREA BIO, INC. reassignment SOLAREA BIO, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: TOLEDO, GERARDO V., BALLOK, ALICIA EVE, CHARBONNEAU, MARK, GREEN, RYAN, Schott, Eric Michael, SOTO-GIRON, Maria Juliana
Publication of US20230190834A1 publication Critical patent/US20230190834A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00—Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/66—Microorganisms or materials therefrom
    • A61K35/74—Bacteria
    • A61K35/741—Probiotics
    • A61K35/744—Lactic acid bacteria, e.g. enterococci, pediococci, lactococci, streptococci or leuconostocs
    • A61K35/747—Lactobacilli, e.g. L. acidophilus or L. brevis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A23—FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS; TREATMENT THEREOF, NOT COVERED BY OTHER CLASSES
    • A23L—FOODS, FOODSTUFFS, OR NON-ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES, NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES A21D OR A23B-A23J; THEIR PREPARATION OR TREATMENT, e.g. COOKING, MODIFICATION OF NUTRITIVE QUALITIES, PHYSICAL TREATMENT; PRESERVATION OF FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS, IN GENERAL
    • A23L33/00—Modifying nutritive qualities of foods; Dietetic products; Preparation or treatment thereof
    • A23L33/10—Modifying nutritive qualities of foods; Dietetic products; Preparation or treatment thereof using additives
    • A23L33/105—Plant extracts, their artificial duplicates or their derivatives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A23—FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS; TREATMENT THEREOF, NOT COVERED BY OTHER CLASSES
    • A23L—FOODS, FOODSTUFFS, OR NON-ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES, NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES A21D OR A23B-A23J; THEIR PREPARATION OR TREATMENT, e.g. COOKING, MODIFICATION OF NUTRITIVE QUALITIES, PHYSICAL TREATMENT; PRESERVATION OF FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS, IN GENERAL
    • A23L33/00—Modifying nutritive qualities of foods; Dietetic products; Preparation or treatment thereof
    • A23L33/10—Modifying nutritive qualities of foods; Dietetic products; Preparation or treatment thereof using additives
    • A23L33/135—Bacteria or derivatives thereof, e.g. probiotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A23—FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS; TREATMENT THEREOF, NOT COVERED BY OTHER CLASSES
    • A23L—FOODS, FOODSTUFFS, OR NON-ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES, NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES A21D OR A23B-A23J; THEIR PREPARATION OR TREATMENT, e.g. COOKING, MODIFICATION OF NUTRITIVE QUALITIES, PHYSICAL TREATMENT; PRESERVATION OF FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS, IN GENERAL
    • A23L33/00—Modifying nutritive qualities of foods; Dietetic products; Preparation or treatment thereof
    • A23L33/10—Modifying nutritive qualities of foods; Dietetic products; Preparation or treatment thereof using additives
    • A23L33/15—Vitamins
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/519—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/525—Isoalloxazines, e.g. riboflavins, vitamin B2
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00—Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/66—Microorganisms or materials therefrom
    • A61K35/74—Bacteria
    • A61K35/741—Probiotics
    • A61K35/742—Spore-forming bacteria, e.g. Bacillus coagulans, Bacillus subtilis, clostridium or Lactobacillus sporogenes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00—Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/66—Microorganisms or materials therefrom
    • A61K35/74—Bacteria
    • A61K35/741—Probiotics
    • A61K35/744—Lactic acid bacteria, e.g. enterococci, pediococci, lactococci, streptococci or leuconostocs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K36/00—Medicinal preparations of undetermined constitution containing material from algae, lichens, fungi or plants, or derivatives thereof, e.g. traditional herbal medicines
    • A61K36/06—Fungi, e.g. yeasts
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00—Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06—Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00—Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K2035/11—Medicinal preparations comprising living procariotic cells
    • A61K2035/115—Probiotics

Definitions

  • Plant-based and fermented foods are rich sources of diverse microbes.
  • Daily consumption of fresh fruits, vegetables, seeds and other plant-derived ingredients of salads and juices is recognized as part of a healthy diet and associated with weight loss, weight management and overall healthy lifestyles. This is demonstrated clinically and epidemiologically in the “China Study” (Campbell, T. C. and Campbell T. M. 2006. The China Study: startling implications for diet, weight loss and long-term health. Benbella books pp 419) where a lower incidence of inflammatory-related indications were observed in rural areas where diets are whole food plant-based. The benefit from these is thought to be derived from the vitamins, fiber, antioxidants, and other molecules that are thought to benefit the microbial flora through the production of prebiotics.
  • microbes can be in the form of fermentation products from the breakdown of complex carbohydrates and other plant-based polymers.
  • compositions comprising viable microbes comprising:
  • compositions comprising:
  • the composition comprises a medical food, nutritional supplement or foodstuff. In certain embodiments of any of the foregoing methods, the composition comprises a pharmaceutical composition.
  • the viable microbes are plant-derived or food-derived.
  • improving immune health comprises reducing inflammation in the human subject.
  • described herein are methods of inhibiting inflammation in a human subject, the method comprising: administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising:
  • the methods result higher circulating levels of at least one anti-inflammatory marker and/or lower circulating levels of at least one inflammation-associated marker in the human subject.
  • the composition is capable of producing neurotransmitters selected from the group consisting of serotonin, gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), dopamine, acetylcholine and combinations thereof.
  • the composition is capable of modulating IFN ⁇ , IL-12, TNF- ⁇ , IL-17, IL-6, IL-1 ⁇ , IL-10 or combinations thereof in the human subject.
  • at least one microbial entity comprises a first genome; wherein the first genome comprises at least one functional expression sequence at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6.
  • At least one microbial entity is capable of producing an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or an enzyme capable of acting on the same substrate as an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6.
  • at least one microbial entity comprises a genus of bacteria with a metabolic signature or functionality selected from Tables 5 or 7.
  • At least one microbial entity comprises one or more features selected from the group consisting of:
  • the not activating a toll-like receptor pathway comprises no activation of TLR4 or TLR5, and/or wherein the activating a toll-like receptor pathway comprises activation of TLR2.
  • the one or more genes induced in IFN- ⁇ treated colonic organoids is selected from the group consisting of genes associated with inflammatory chemokine signaling, Nuclear Factor Kappa B (NF- ⁇ B) signaling, TNF family signaling, type I interferon signaling, type II interferon signaling, TLR signaling, lymphocyte trafficking, Th17 cell differentiation, Th1 differentiation, Th2 differentiation, apoptosis, inflammasomes, autophagy, oxidative stress, major histocompatibility (MHC) class I and II antigen presentation, complement, mTor, nod-like receptor signaling, Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-Bisphosphate 3-Kinase (PI3K) signaling, and combinations thereof.
  • MHC major histocompatibility
  • the one or more inhibitory receptors on T cells is selected from the group consisting of T Cell Immunoreceptor With Ig And ITIM Domains (TIGIT), T-Cell Immunoglobulin Mucin Family Member 3 (TIM-3), Lymphocyte Activating 3 (LAG-3), and combinations thereof.
  • TAGIT T Cell Immunoreceptor With Ig And ITIM Domains
  • TIM-3 T-Cell Immunoglobulin Mucin Family Member 3
  • LAG-3 Lymphocyte Activating 3
  • the one or more genes or proteins associated with T cell activation and/or function is selected from the group consisting of CD45RO, CD69, IL-24, TNF- ⁇ , perforin, IFN- ⁇ , and combinations thereof.
  • At least one microbial entity is capable of producing (a) one or more indole-containing compounds, optionally wherein the indole-containing compound is selected from the group consisting of indole, indole acetic acid (IAA), and indole propionic acid (IPA) and/or (b) bacteriocins and/or antibacterial peptides and/or (c) a biosurfactant that reduces pro-inflammatory cytokines.
  • IAA indole acetic acid
  • IPA indole propionic acid
  • At least one microbial entity metabolizes human produced primary bile acids into secondary bile acids, optionally wherein the primary bile acid is cholic acid, chenodeoxycholic acid, or combinations thereof, and optionally wherein the secondary bile acid inhibits FXR and/or activates TGR5.
  • at least one microbial entity produces more omega-3 fatty acids compared to omega-6 fatty acids.
  • at least one microbial entity comprises one or more bacteria that are capable of producing a metabolite selected from Tables 5 or 7.
  • the composition further comprises a metabolite selected from Tables 5 or 7.
  • the composition further comprises a prebiotic fiber.
  • the inhibition of inflammation in the subject is caused by the production at least one anti-inflammatory metabolite by at least one microbial entity.
  • the method reduces the level and/or activity of at least one inflammatory cytokine from Table 8 relative to a level and/or activity of the inflammatory cytokine in the serum of the human subject; or a tissue of the subject, prior to administering the pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or food stuff.
  • method comprises treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an immune system disorder.
  • the immune system disorder is selected from the group consisting of allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, allergic bronchial asthma, atopic eczema, anaphylaxis, insect sting, drug allergy, food allergy, asthma, eczema, a disorder or condition associated with a pathological Th17 activity, and a rheumatic disease selected from spondyloarthritis, psoriasis and rheumatoid arthritis.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways involving Gamma aminobutyric acid (GABA).
  • GABA Gamma aminobutyric acid
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of succinate, acrylate and propanediol.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of Butyrate.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of phenylalanine, tyrosine and tryptophan biosynthesis.
  • FIG. 5 A is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the deconjugation of Tauro-Cholic Acid (CA)/Glyco-CA and subsequent conversion to 12-dehydro-CA, UCA, and Iso-CA.
  • CA Tauro-Cholic Acid
  • FIG. 5 B is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the deconjugation of Tauro-Chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA)/Glyco-CDCA and subsequent conversion to Ursodeoxycholic acid (UDCA).
  • CDCA Tauro-Chenodeoxycholic acid
  • UDCA Ursodeoxycholic acid
  • FIG. 5 C is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the conversion of CA to Deoxycholic acid (DCA) via the bai pathway.
  • FIG. 5 D is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the conversion of CDCA to Lithocholic acid (LCA) via the bai pathway.
  • FIG. 5 E is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the conversion of UDCA to Lithocholic acid (LCA) via the bai pathway.
  • FIG. 6 is a table listing the enzymes involved in the biosynthesis of EPS.
  • FIG. 7 is a table listing the essential genes in the Lactobacillus EPS gene clusters and families.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of tryptophan and indole 3 acetic acid.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of tryptophan and indole 3 acetic acid.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram of the genes and proteins that comprise the flagellum.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram of the genes and chemical structure of Surfactin A.
  • FIG. 12 (top) is a diagram of the organization and positions of the homologous gene clusters in B. subtilis RB14.
  • the iturin operon was reported to be more than 38 kb long and composed of four open reading frames, ituD, ituA, ituB, and ituC.
  • a diagram of the chemical structure of Iturin surfactant is also shown (bottom).
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram of the chemical structure of fengycin surfactant. This peptide is synthesized nonribosomally by five fengycin synthetases, which interlock in the order of FenC-FenD-FenE-FenA-FenB to form a complex.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram of the cellular regulation of Nisin surfactant.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram of the biosynthetic pathways of omega-3 pulynsaturated fatty acids, PUFA and PUHC. Domain designations within the Pfa synthase are; phosphopantetheinyl transferase (PPT), ⁇ -ketoacyl synthase (KS), malonyl-CoA:ACP transacylase (MAT), acyl-carrier protein (ACP), ketoacyl reductase (KR), dehydratase/isomerase (DH), acyltransferase (AT), chain-length factor (CLF), and enoyl reductase (ER).
  • PPT phosphopantetheinyl transferase
  • KS ⁇ -ketoacyl synthase
  • MAT malonyl-CoA:ACP transacylase
  • ACP acyl-carrier protein
  • KR ketoacyl reductase
  • DH dehydratase/isomerase
  • DH acy
  • FIG. 16 are diagrams of biosynthetic pathways of type II fatty acids.
  • FIG. 17 A is a graph depicting butyrate production of the indicated strains and DMAs.
  • FIG. 17 B is a graph depicting propionate production of the indicated strains and DMAs.
  • FIG. 18 is a graph depicting TNF ⁇ secretion of co-cultures of the indicated strains and DMAs with macrophage-like cells.
  • FIG. 19 is a graph depicting IL-8 secretion of co-cultures of the indicated strains and DMAs with intestinal epithelial cells.
  • FIG. 20 is a graph depicting IL-8 secretion of co-cultures of the indicated strains and DMAs with intestinal epithelial cells.
  • FIG. 21 is a graph depicting GABA production of the indicated strains and DMAs. Vertical lines separate each indicated DMA and strains that comprise each DMA are shown individually adjacent to the indicated DMA.
  • FIG. 22 is a graph depicting Serotonin production of the indicated strains and DMAs. Vertical lines separate each indicated DMA and strains that comprise each DMA are shown individually adjacent to the indicated DMA.
  • FIG. 23 is a graph depicting the concentration of serotonin produced in vitro by the indictated cultured DMAs.
  • FIG. 24 is a graph depicting the concentration of serotonin produced in vitro by the indictated cultured individual strains of the DMAs, the sum of the serotonin produced of the individual stains (“sum”) and the concentration of serotonin produced in vitro by the indicated cultured DMAs.
  • FIG. 25 are graphs depicting the concentration of metabolites: acetate (top left), butyrate (top right), propionate (bottom left) and GABA (bottom right), measured in the culture medium of the indicated DMAs cultured in vitro. “ND” indicates not detected.
  • FIG. 26 are graphs depicting concentration of cytokines IL-1 ⁇ , IL-6, IL-10 and TNF ⁇ in culture media of macrophages cultured in vitro with the indicated DMAs, medium alone (RPMI) or lipopolysacharride (LPS) positive control.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram depicting the experimental design for a delayed type hypersensitivity (DTH) mouse model for testing DMAs in vivo. Images of exemplary healthy and unhealthy (inflamed) mouse paws are shown at bottom.
  • DTH delayed type hypersensitivity
  • FIG. 28 is a graph depicting quantification of paw swelling in mice administered the indicated DMA compositions or vehicle control (water).
  • Y-axis indicates paw swelling, measured by the difference between the injected (DTH) and uninjected (control) paw by calipers (mm)* p ⁇ 0.05, One-way ANOVA with Dunnett's multiple comparisons test.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram depicting the experimental design for a mouse collagen-induced arthritis (CIA) model of rheumatoid arthritis for testing DMAs effects on disease progression and immune system activity. Exemplary images of healthy and arthritic paws are shown (bottom).
  • CIA mouse collagen-induced arthritis
  • the term “derived from” includes microbes immediately taken from an environmental sample as well as microbes isolated from an environmental source and subsequently grown in pure culture.
  • the term “derived from” also includes material isolated from the recited source, and materials obtained using the isolated materials (e.g., cultures of microorganisms made from microorganisms isolated from the recited source).
  • the term “preventing” includes completely or substantially reducing the likelihood or occurrence or the severity of initial clinical or aesthetical symptoms of a condition.
  • the term “about” includes variation of up to approximately +/ ⁇ 10% and that allows for functional equivalence in the product.
  • colony-forming unit or “cfu” is an individual cell that is able to clone itself into an entire colony of identical cells.
  • viable organisms are organisms that are capable of growth and multiplication. In some embodiments, viability can be assessed by numbers of colony-forming units that can be cultured. In some embodiments viability can be assessed by other means, such as quantitative polymerase chain reaction.
  • Microbiome refers to the genetic content of the communities of microbes that live inside and on the human body, or inside or outside a plant, both sustainably and transiently, including eukaryotes, archaea, bacteria, and viruses (including bacterial viruses (i.e., phage)), wherein “genetic content” includes genomic DNA, RNA such as ribosomal RNA, the epigenome, plasmids, and all other types of genetic information.
  • microbial entity refers to the community of microorganisms that occur (sustainably or transiently) in and on a plant or an animal subject, typically a mammal such as a human, including eukaryotes, archaea, bacteria, and viruses (including bacterial viruses i.e., phage).
  • metabolic signature refers to the ability of an organism to produce or utilize one or more metabolites.
  • RNA or DNA any polynucleotide (RNA or DNA) or amino acid sequence resulting in a functional polynucleotide (e.g., mRNA, tRNA rRNA) or protein, including fragments of protein that form functional binding domains or domains with a discrete activity (e.g., enzymatic activity) within the cell.
  • a functional polynucleotide e.g., mRNA, tRNA rRNA
  • protein including fragments of protein that form functional binding domains or domains with a discrete activity (e.g., enzymatic activity) within the cell.
  • a “combination” of two or more bacteria includes the physical co-existence of the two bacteria, either in the same material or product or in physically connected products, as well as the temporal co-administration or co-localization of the two bacteria.
  • heterologous designates organisms to be administered that are not naturally present in the same proportions as in the therapeutic composition as in subjects to be treated with the therapeutic composition. These can be organisms that are not normally present in individuals in need of the composition described herein, or organisms that are not present in sufficient proportion in said individuals. These organisms can comprise a synthetic composition of organisms derived from separate plant sources or can comprise a composition of organisms derived from the same plant source, or a combination thereof.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle refers to any compound or device that is formulated with the microbial entities into a pharmaceutical composition described herein to improve delivery of the pharmaceutical composition to the subject to which the composition has been administered.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicles include excipients, liposomes, nanoparticles, and nanovectors.
  • Medical food refers to the FDA designation of a nutritional composition for oral administration that includes a therapeutic or prophylactic substance. Medical foods can be in solid, liquid or gel form.
  • foodstuff refers to a nutritional composition for oral administration that is in solid, liquid or gel form.
  • a medical food can also be a foodstuff.
  • a metabolite refers to capability of a microbial entity described herein to metabolize a metabolite into a different form, either by catabolism or anabolism.
  • anti-inflammatory product refers to any substance that has an effect (either direct or indirect) on a subject in contact with the product that results in reduction of inflammation, or any detectable markers of inflammation known in the art.
  • pro-inflammatory cytokines refers to small proteins that regulate the activity of blood cells such as immune system cells and are involved in the upregulation of inflammatory reactions.
  • Pro-inflammatory cytokines can be produced by activated macrophages or other immune cells, endothelial cells and epithelial cells.
  • immune health refers to the functions and activity of the immune system and cells associated with the immune system of a healthy subject.
  • improving immune health refers to modulating the activity and/or function of the immune system so as to increase the immune system's ability to detect foreign antigens, pathogens, and/or abonormal cells (such as but not limited to cancer cells and infected cells), and/or refers to modulating the immune system's activity and/or function in a subject exhibiting abnormally increased immune system activity/immune response relative to healthy subjects, such as conditions or diseases related to increased inflammation (such as, but not limited to, Alheimer's disease, cancer, asthma, heart disease, type II diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis) and/or conditions or diseases related to increased immune response (e.g., autoimmune disease).
  • ameliorating refers to any therapeutically beneficial result in the treatment of a disease state, e.g., an immune system disorder disease state, including prophylaxis, lessening in the severity or progression, remission, or cure thereof.
  • in situ refers to processes that occur in a living cell growing separate from a living organism, e.g., growing in tissue culture.
  • in vivo refers to processes that occur in a living organism.
  • mammal as used herein includes both humans and non-humans and include but is not limited to humans, non-human primates, canines, felines, murines, bovines, equines, and porcines.
  • sufficient amount means an amount sufficient to produce a desired effect, e.g., an amount sufficient to modulate inflammation.
  • terapéuticaally effective amount is an amount that is effective to ameliorate a symptom of a disease.
  • rDNA refers to ribosomal DNA
  • HDAC histone deacetylase
  • IL-10 refers to Interleukin 10
  • IL-6 refers to Interleukin 6
  • TNF ⁇ refers to Tumor Necrosis Factor Alpha
  • IFN- ⁇ refers to Interferon Gamma
  • TLR refers to Toll Like Receptor.
  • This disclosure has several advantages, such as providing for new pharmaceutical compositions, dietary supplements, medical foods and solid food stuff, comprising new combinations of live microbe populations for the treatment and/or prevention of immune system disorders and conditions related to inflammation, including both pathogen assisted conditions and conditions that are independent of pathogens. Included with the present disclosure are methods for use of the pharmaceutical composition, dietary supplements, medical foods and solid food stuff products, and methods for selecting microbial entities to formulate same.
  • percent of “identity,” in the context of two or more nucleic acid or polypeptide sequences, refer to two or more sequences or subsequences that have a specified percentage of nucleotides or amino acid residues that are the same, when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence, as measured using one of the sequence comparison algorithms described below (e.g., BLASTP and BLASTN or other algorithms available to persons of skill) or by visual inspection.
  • sequence comparison algorithms e.g., BLASTP and BLASTN or other algorithms available to persons of skill
  • the percent of “identity” can exist over a region of the sequence being compared, e.g., over a functional domain, or, alternatively, exist over the full length of the two sequences to be compared.
  • sequence comparison typically one sequence acts as a reference sequence to which test sequences are compared.
  • test and reference sequences are input into a computer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, and sequence algorithm program parameters are designated.
  • sequence comparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identity for the test sequence(s) relative to the reference sequence, based on the designated program parameters.
  • Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith & Waterman, Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482 (1981), by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman & Wunsch, J. Mol. Biol. 48:443 (1970), by the search for similarity method of Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (1988), by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Dr., Madison, Wis.), or by visual inspection (see generally Ausubel et al., infra).
  • BLAST algorithm One example of an algorithm that is suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity is the BLAST algorithm, which is described in Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410 (1990). Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information (www.ncbi.nlm nih.gov/).
  • compositions such as pharmaceutical compositions, medical foods and solid food stuff comprising a combination of two or more microbial entities.
  • compositions comprising bacterial entities comprising bacterial species.
  • the bacterial entity comprises bacterial species comprising: a 16S rDNA gene sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-83 selected from Table 4.
  • the bacterial entity comprises a bacterial species comprising: an 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or at least 99% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-83.
  • the bacterial entity comprises bacterial species comprising: a first genome; wherein the first genome comprises at least one functional expression sequence at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6.
  • the first genome comprises at least one functional expression sequence at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6.
  • the functional expression sequence can be a gene coding for a protein, an RNA (e.g., an rRNA, an mRNA), or a fragment of a protein (e.g., a binding domain, or an activation domain, or catalytic domain), or a fragment of a nucleic acid (e.g., a fragment of an mRNA coding for a protein domain).
  • an RNA e.g., an rRNA, an mRNA
  • a fragment of a protein e.g., a binding domain, or an activation domain, or catalytic domain
  • a fragment of a nucleic acid e.g., a fragment of an mRNA coding for a protein domain.
  • compositions for proving immune health comprising viable microbes, comprising:
  • compositions for improving immune health comprising:
  • the bacterial entity comprises bacterial species comprising: a bacterial species capable of producing an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6 or an enzyme capable of acting on the same substrate as an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6.
  • the bacterial species is capable of producing an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99%, identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6.
  • the bacterial species is capable of producing an enzyme capable of acting on the same substrate as an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99%, identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6.
  • the bacterial species comprises one or more features selected from the group consisting of: (i) capable of engrafting when administered to a subject, (ii) capable of having anti-inflammatory activity, (iii) not capable of inducing pro-inflammatory activity, (iv) capable of producing a secondary bile acid, (v) capable of producing a tryptophan metabolite, (vi) capable of restoring epithelial integrity as determined by a primary epithelial cell monolayer barrier integrity assay, (vii) capable of being associated with remission of an inflammatory bowel disease, (viii) capable of producing a short-chain fatty acid, (ix) capable of inhibiting a HDAC activity, (x) capable of producing a medium-chain fatty acid, (xi) capable of expressing catalase activity, (xii) capable of having alpha-fucosidase activity, (xiii) capable of inducing Wnt activation, (xiv) capable of producing a B vitamin, (
  • the one or more genes induced in IFN- ⁇ treated colonic organoids is selected from genes associated with inflammatory chemokine signaling, NF- ⁇ B signaling, TNF family signaling, type I interferon signaling, type II interferon signaling, TLR signaling, lymphocyte trafficking, Th17 cell differentiation, Th1 differentiation, Th2 differentiation, apoptosis, inflammasomes, autophagy, oxidative stress, MHC class I and II antigen presentation, complement, mTor, nod-like receptor signaling, PI3K signaling, and combinations thereof.
  • the one or more inhibitory receptors on T cells is selected from TIGIT, TIM-3, LAG-3, and combinations thereof.
  • the one or more genes or proteins associated with T cell activation and/or function is selected from CD45RO, CD69, IL-24, TNF- ⁇ , perforin, IFN- ⁇ , and combinations thereof.
  • the first bacterial species is capable of producing indole-containing compounds.
  • the indole containing compound is selected from indole, indole acetic acid (IAA), and indole propionic acid (IPA).
  • the bacterial species is capable of producing bacteriocins and antibacterial peptides.
  • the bacterial species is capable of producing neurotransmitters selected from serotonin, gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), dopamine, and combinations thereof.
  • the bacterial species is capable of producing IFN ⁇ , IL-12, TNF- ⁇ , IL-17, IL-6, or combinations thereof.
  • first bacterial species is capable of producing a biosurfactant that reduces pro-inflammatory cytokines such as IL-1 ⁇ , iNOS, and/or TNF- ⁇ .
  • bacterial species metabolizes human produced primary bile acids into secondary bile acids.
  • the primary bile acid is cholic acid, chenodeoxycholic acid, or combinations thereof.
  • the secondary bile acid inhibits FXR and/or activates TGR5.
  • the bacterial species produce more omega-3 fatty acids compared to omega-6 fatty acids.
  • bacterial species comprises one or more bacteria that are capable of producing a metabolite selected from Tables 5 or 7.
  • compositions comprising fungal entities comprising fungal species.
  • the composition described herein comprises at least one fungal species comprising an 18S rDNA or ITS (Internal Transcribed Spacer) sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 18S rDNA or ITS sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO 1-83 selected from Table 4.
  • the composition described herein comprise at least one fungal species comprising an 18S rDNA or ITS sequence that is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or at least 99% identical to a 18S rDNA or ITS sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-83 selected from Table 4.
  • the composition described herein comprise at least one fungal species comprising a genome comprising a functional expression sequence selected from at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6.
  • composition described herein comprise at least one fungal species capable of producing a metabolite, or has a functionality selected from Tables 5 or 7.
  • compositions Comprising Bacterial and Fungal Entities
  • compositions comprising at least one bacterial entity and at least one fungal entity.
  • the composition comprises: composition comprising a population of viable microbes, comprising: (i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising: (a) an 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-83; (b) a first genome; wherein the first genome comprises at least one functional expression sequence at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6; or (c) a bacterial species capable of producing an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 80% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6 or an enzyme capable of acting on the same substrate as an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 80% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6; (ii) a second microbial entity comprising a first fungal species comprising: (a) an 18
  • compositions described herein comprise at least one additional microbial entity. In certain embodiments, the compositions described herein comprise 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more microbial entities.
  • the composition is formulated in an oral dosage form comprising between 1 ⁇ 10 6 and 1 ⁇ 10 12 cfu/dose of each of the bacterial entity and the fungal entity.
  • the composition comprises at least 1 ⁇ 10 6 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 7 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 8 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 9 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 10 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 11 cfu/dose of the bacterial entity.
  • the composition comprises at least 1 ⁇ 10 6 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 7 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 8 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 9 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 10 , at least 1 ⁇ 10 11 cfu/dose of the fungal entity.
  • the bacterial entity and the fungal entity synergize to produce an anti-inflammatory effect in a mammalian host.
  • the anti-inflammatory effect in a mammalian host is caused by the production at least one anti-inflammatory metabolite by either the bacterial entity, the fungal entity or both the bacterial and fungal entities.
  • administering an effective dose of the composition to a human subject reduces the level and/or activity of at least one inflammatory cytokine from Table 8 relative to a level and/or activity of the inflammatory cytokine in the serum of the human subject; or a tissue of the subject, prior to administering the pharmaceutical composition to the subject.
  • administering an effective dose of the pharmaceutical composition to a human subject treats, prevents, or reduces the severity of at least one symptom in the subject of an immune system disorder.
  • the immune system disorder is selected from allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, allergic bronchial asthma, atopic eczema, anaphylaxis, insect sting, drug allergy, food allergy, asthma, eczema, a disorder or condition associated with a pathological Th17 activity, or combinations thereof.
  • the human subject has an altered Th17 activity,
  • administering an effective dose of the pharmaceutical composition to a human subject treats, prevents, or reduces the severity of at least one symptom in the subject of a rheumatic disease selected from rheumatoid arthritis, spondyloarthritis, and psoriasis.
  • administering an effective dose of the pharmaceutical composition to a human subject treats, prevents, or reduces the severity of at least one symptom in the subject of periodontal disease.
  • administering an effective dose of the pharmaceutical composition to a human subject treats, prevents, or reduces the severity of at least one symptom in the subject of gastritis.
  • the gastritis is H. pylori -associated gastritis.
  • compositions can comprise, in addition to one or more of the microbial entities described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle is an excipient.
  • the composition comprises at least one carbohydrate.
  • a “carbohydrate” refers to a sugar or polymer of sugars.
  • saccharide polysaccharide
  • carbohydrate oligosaccharide
  • Most carbohydrates are aldehydes or ketones with many hydroxyl groups, usually one on each carbon atom of the molecule.
  • Carbohydrates generally have the molecular formula CnH2nOn.
  • a carbohydrate can be a monosaccharide, a disaccharide, trisaccharide, oligosaccharide, or polysaccharide.
  • the most basic carbohydrate is a monosaccharide, such as glucose, sucrose, galactose, mannose, ribose, arabinose, xylose, and fructose.
  • Disaccharides are two joined monosaccharides. Exemplary disaccharides include sucrose, maltose, cellobiose, and lactose.
  • an oligosaccharide includes between three and six monosaccharide units (e.g., raffinose, stachyose), and polysaccharides include six or more monosaccharide units.
  • Exemplary polysaccharides include starch, glycogen, and cellulose.
  • Carbohydrates may contain modified saccharide units such as 2′-deoxyribose wherein a hydroxyl group is removed, 2′-fluororibose wherein a hydroxyl group is replace with a fluorine, or N-acetylglucosamine, a nitrogen-containing form of glucose (e.g., 2′-fluororibose, deoxyribose, and hexose).
  • Carbohydrates may exist in many different forms, for example, conformers, cyclic forms, acyclic forms, stereoisomers, tautomers, anomers, and isomers.
  • the composition comprises at least one lipid.
  • a “lipid” includes fats, oils, triglycerides, cholesterol, phospholipids, fatty acids in any form including free fatty acids. Fats, oils and fatty acids can be saturated, unsaturated (cis or trans) or partially unsaturated (cis or trans).
  • the lipid comprises at least one fatty acid selected from lauric acid (12:0), myristic acid (14:0), palmitic acid (16:0), palmitoleic acid (16:1), margaric acid (17:0), heptadecenoic acid (17:1), stearic acid (18:0), oleic acid (18:1), linoleic acid (18:2), linolenic acid (18:3), octadecatetraenoic acid (18:4), arachidic acid (20:0), eicosenoic acid (20:1), eicosadienoic acid (20:2), eicosatetraenoic acid (20:4), eicosapentaenoic acid (20:5) (EPA), docosanoic acid (22:0), docosenoic acid (22:1), docosapentaenoic acid (22:5), docosahexaenoic acid (22:6) (DHA), and t
  • the composition comprises at least one supplemental mineral or mineral source.
  • supplemental mineral or mineral source examples include, without limitation: chloride, sodium, calcium, iron, chromium, copper, iodine, zinc, magnesium, manganese, molybdenum, phosphorus, potassium, and selenium.
  • Suitable forms of any of the foregoing minerals include soluble mineral salts, slightly soluble mineral salts, insoluble mineral salts, chelated minerals, mineral complexes, non-reactive minerals such as carbonyl minerals, and reduced minerals, and combinations thereof.
  • the composition comprises at least one supplemental vitamin.
  • the at least one vitamin can be fat-soluble or water soluble vitamins.
  • Suitable vitamins include but are not limited to vitamin C, vitamin A, vitamin E, vitamin B12, vitamin K, riboflavin, niacin, vitamin D, vitamin B6, folic acid, pyridoxine, thiamine, pantothenic acid, and biotin.
  • Suitable forms of any of the foregoing are salts of the vitamin, derivatives of the vitamin, compounds having the same or similar activity of the vitamin, and metabolites of the vitamin.
  • the composition comprises at least one dietary supplement.
  • Suitable examples are well known in the art and include herbs, botanicals, and certain hormones.
  • Non limiting examples of dietary supplements include ginko, gensing, and melatonin.
  • the composition comprises an excipient.
  • suitable excipients include a tastant, a flavorant, a buffering agent, a preservative, a stabilizer, a binder, a compaction agent, a lubricant, a dispersion enhancer, a disintegration agent, a flavoring agent, a sweetener, a coloring agent.
  • the excipient is a buffering agent.
  • suitable buffering agents include sodium citrate, magnesium carbonate, magnesium bicarbonate, calcium carbonate, and calcium bicarbonate.
  • the excipient comprises a preservative.
  • suitable preservatives include antioxidants, such as alpha-tocopherol and ascorbate, and antimicrobials, such as parabens, chlorobutanol, and phenol.
  • the composition comprises a binder as an excipient.
  • suitable binders include starches, pregelatinized starches, gelatin, polyvinylpyrolidone, cellulose, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose, polyacrylamides, polyvinyloxoazolidone, polyvinylalcohols, C12-C18 fatty acid alcohol, polyethylene glycol, polyols, saccharides, oligosaccharides, and combinations thereof.
  • the composition comprises a lubricant as an excipient.
  • suitable lubricants include magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, zinc stearate, hydrogenated vegetable oils, sterotex, polyoxyethylene monostearate, talc, polyethyleneglycol, sodium benzoate, sodium lauryl sulfate, magnesium lauryl sulfate, and light mineral oil.
  • the composition comprises a dispersion enhancer as an excipient.
  • suitable dispersants include starch, alginic acid, polyvinylpyrrolidones, guar gum, kaolin, bentonite, purified wood cellulose, sodium starch glycolate, isoamorphous silicate, and microcrystalline cellulose as high HLB emulsifier surfactants.
  • the composition comprises a disintegrant as an excipient.
  • the disintegrant is a non-effervescent disintegrant.
  • suitable non-effervescent disintegrants include starches such as corn starch, potato starch, pregelatinized and modified starches thereof, sweeteners, clays, such as bentonite, micro-crystalline cellulose, alginates, sodium starch glycolate, gums such as agar, guar, locust bean, karaya, pecitin, and tragacanth.
  • the disintegrant is an effervescent disintegrant.
  • suitable effervescent disintegrants include sodium bicarbonate in combination with citric acid, and sodium bicarbonate in combination with tartaric acid.
  • the excipient comprises a flavoring agent.
  • Flavoring agents incorporated into the outer layer can be chosen from synthetic flavor oils and flavoring aromatics; natural oils; extracts from plants, leaves, flowers, and fruits; and combinations thereof.
  • the flavoring agent is selected from cinnamon oils; oil of wintergreen; peppermint oils; clover oil; hay oil; anise oil; eucalyptus; vanilla; citrus oil such as lemon oil, orange oil, grape and grapefruit oil; and fruit essences including apple, peach, pear, strawberry, raspberry, cherry, plum, pineapple, and apricot.
  • the excipient comprises a sweetener.
  • suitable sweeteners include glucose (corn syrup), dextrose, invert sugar, fructose, and mixtures thereof (when not used as a carrier); saccharin and its various salts such as the sodium salt; dipeptide sweeteners such as aspartame; dihydrochalcone compounds, glycyrrhizin; Stevia rebaudiana (Stevioside); chloro derivatives of sucrose such as sucralose; and sugar alcohols such as sorbitol, mannitol, sylitol, and the like.
  • hydrogenated starch hydrolysates and the synthetic sweetener 3,6-dihydro-6-methyl-1,2,3-oxathiazin-4-one-2,2-dioxide particularly the potassium salt (acesulfame-K), and sodium and calcium salts thereof.
  • the composition comprises a coloring agent.
  • suitable color agents include food, drug and cosmetic colors (FD&C), drug and cosmetic colors (D&C), and external drug and cosmetic colors (Ext. D&C).
  • the coloring agents can be used as dyes or their corresponding lakes.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle comprises a liposome.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle comprises a nanoparticle.
  • the nanoparticle is a nanovector.
  • the nanovector comprises an amphiphillic polymer.
  • the delivery vehicle comprises fruit and/or vegetable powder or extract(s).
  • the weight fraction of the excipient or combination of excipients in the formulation of the pharmaceutical composition is usually about 50% or less, about 45% or less, about 40% or less, about 35% or less, about 30% or less, about 25% or less, about 20% or less, about 15% or less, about 10% or less, about 5% or less, about 2% or less, or about 1% or less of the total weight of the amino acids in the composition.
  • compositions can depend on whether the composition is a pharmaceutical composition, a medical food, or a solid food stuff and the oral dosage form.
  • compositions formulated for oral delivery to a subject in need thereof are methods and compositions formulated for oral delivery to a subject in need thereof.
  • a composition is formulated to deliver a composition comprising combinations of microbial entities disclosed herein to a subject in need thereof.
  • a pharmaceutical composition is formulated to deliver a composition comprising a combinations of microbial entities to a subject in need thereof.
  • a composition is formulated to deliver a composition comprising prebiotic and a probiotic to a subject in need thereof.
  • Compositions for oral administration can be in tablet, capsule, powder or liquid form.
  • a composition is administered in solid, semi-solid, micro-emulsion, gel, or liquid form.
  • dosage forms include tablet forms disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,048,526, 3,108,046, 4,786,505, 4,919,939, and 4,950,484; gel forms disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,904,479, 6,482,435, 6,572,871, and 5,013,726; capsule forms disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,800,083, 4,532,126, 4,935,243, and 6,258,380; or liquid forms disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,625,494, 4,478,822, and 5,610,184; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • compositions that can be used orally include tablets, push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. Tablets can be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients including freeze-dried plant material serving both as prebiotic and as a filler.
  • Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with binders (e.g., povidone, gelatin, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), inert diluents, preservative, antioxidant, disintegrant (e.g., sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose) or lubricating, surface active or dispersing agents.
  • binders e.g., povidone, gelatin, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose
  • inert diluents preservative, antioxidant
  • disintegrant e.g., sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose
  • Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • the tablets can optionally be coated or scored and can be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein. Tablets can optionally be provided with an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut (e.g., colon, lower intestine) other than the stomach. All formulations for oral administration can be in dosages suitable for such administration.
  • the push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with filler such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers.
  • the active compounds prebiotics or probiotics
  • suitable liquids such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols.
  • Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings.
  • suitable coatings can be used, which can optionally contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • Dyestuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or Dragee coatings for identification or to characterize different combinations of active compound doses.
  • Formulations for oral use can also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water soluble carrier such as polyethylene glycol or an oil medium, for example peanut oil, liquid paraffin, or olive oil.
  • an inert solid diluent for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • water soluble carrier such as polyethylene glycol or an oil medium, for example peanut oil, liquid paraffin, or olive oil.
  • Oral liquid preparations can be in the form of, for example, aqueous or oily suspensions, solutions, emulsions syrups or elixirs, or can be presented as a dry product for reconstitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
  • Such liquid preparations can contain conventional additives, such as suspending agents, for example sorbitol, methyl cellulose, glucose syrup, gelatin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, aluminum stearate gel or hydrogenated edible fats, emulsifying agents, for example lecithin, sorbitan monooleate, acacia; nonaqueous vehicles (which can include edible oils), for example almond oil, oily esters such as glycerine, propylene glycol, or ethyl alcohol; preservatives, for example methyl or propyl p-hydoxybenzoate or sorbic acid, and, if desired, conventional flavoring or coloring agents.
  • suspending agents for example sorbitol,
  • a provided composition includes a softgel formulation.
  • a softgel can contain a gelatin-based shell that surrounds a liquid fill.
  • the shell can be made of gelatin, plasticiser (e.g., glycerin and/or sorbitol), modifier, water, color, antioxidant, or flavor.
  • the shell can be made with starch or carrageenan.
  • the outer layer can be enteric coated.
  • a softgel formulation can include a water or oil soluble fill solution, or suspension of a composition, for example, a prebiotic composition, covered by a layer of gelatin.
  • An enteric coating can control the location of a microbial entity described herien and how it is absorbed in the digestive system.
  • an enteric coating can be designed such that a composition comprising the microbial entity does not dissolve in the stomach but rather travels to the small intestine, where it dissolves.
  • An enteric coating can be stable at low pH (such as in the stomach) and can dissolve at higher pH (for example, in the small intestine).
  • Material that can be used in enteric coatings includes, for example, alginic acid, cellulose acetate phthalate, plastics, waxes, shellac, and fatty acids (e.g., stearic acid, palmitic acid). Enteric coatings are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • the enteric coating can be an aqueous enteric coating.
  • examples of polymers that can be used in enteric coatings include, for example, shellac (trade name EmCoat 120 N, Marcoat 125); cellulose acetate phthalate (trade name aquacoat CPD®, SepifilmTM LP, Klucel, Aquacoat® ECD, and Metolose®); polyvinylacetate phthalate (trade name Sureteric®); and methacrylic acid (trade name Eudragit®).
  • an enteric coated composition comprising a microbial entity is administered to a subject.
  • an enteric coated composition is administered to a subject.
  • the stomach has an acidic environment that can kill microbial entities.
  • An enteric coating can protect microbial entities as they pass through the stomach and small intestine.
  • Enteric coatings can be used to (1) prevent the gastric juice from reacting with or destroying the active substance, (2) prevent dilution of the active substance before it reaches the intestine, (3) ensure that the active substance is not released until after the preparation has passed the stomach, and (4) prevent live bacteria contained in the preparation from being killed because of the low pH-value in the stomach.
  • Enteric coatings can also be used for avoiding irritation of or damage to the mucous membrane of the stomach caused by substances contained in the oral preparation, and for counteracting or preventing formation or release of substances having an unpleasant odor or taste in the stomach. Finally, such coatings can be used for preventing nausea or vomiting on intake of oral preparations.
  • a composition comprising the microbial entities described herien is provided as a tablet, capsule, or caplet with an enteric coating.
  • the enteric coating is designed to hold the tablet, capsule, or caplet together when in the stomach.
  • the enteric coating is designed to hold together in acid conditions of the stomach and break down in non-acid conditions and therefore release the drug in the intestines.
  • Softgel delivery systems can also incorporate phospholipids or polymers or natural gums to entrap a composition, for example, a prebiotic composition, in the gelatin layer with an outer coating to give desired delayed/control release effects, such as an enteric coating.
  • Formulations of softgel fills can be at pH 2.5-7.5.
  • a softgel formulation can be sealed tightly in an automatic manner
  • a softgel formulation can easily be swallowed, allow for product identification using colors and several shapes, allow uniformity, precision and accuracy between dosages, be safe against adulteration, provide good availability and rapid absorption, and offer protection against contamination, light and oxidation.
  • softgel formulations can avoid unpleasant flavors due to content encapsulation.
  • a composition comprising a softgel formulation can be in any of number of different sizes, including, for example, round, oblong, oval, tube, droplet, or suppositories.
  • a composition in a dosage form which comprises an effective amount of microbial entities and one or more release controlling excipients as described herein.
  • Suitable modified release dosage vehicles include, but are not limited to, hydrophilic or hydrophobic matrix devices, water-soluble separating layer coatings, enteric coatings, osmotic devices, multi-particulate devices, and combinations thereof.
  • the dosage form is a tablet, caplet, capsule or lollipop.
  • the dosage form is a liquid, oral suspension, oral solution, or oral syrup.
  • the dosage form is a gel capsule, soft gelatin capsule, or hard gelatin capsule.
  • the dosage form is a gelatin capsule having a size indicated in Table 1.
  • compositions comprising microbial entities is provided in effervescent dosage forms.
  • the compositions can also comprise non-release controlling excipients.
  • a composition comprising a microbial entities is provided in a dosage form that has at least one component that can facilitate release of the prebiotic.
  • the dosage form can be capable of giving a discontinuous release of the compound in the form of at least two consecutive pulses separated in time from 0.1 up to 24 hours.
  • the compositions can comprise one or more release controlling and non-release controlling excipients, such as those excipients suitable for a disruptable semi-permeable membrane and as swellable substances.
  • compositions described herein comprise a plant or plant extract, either in solid or liquid form.
  • a composition comprising microbial entities is provided in an enteric coated dosage form.
  • the composition can also comprise non-release controlling excipients.
  • a composition comprising microbial entities in a dosage form for oral administration to a subject in need thereof, which comprises one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or carriers, enclosed in an intermediate reactive layer comprising a gastric juice-resistant polymeric layered material partially neutralized with alkali and having cation exchange capacity and a gastric juice-resistant outer layer.
  • compositions comprising the microbial entities is provided in the form of enteric-coated granules, for oral administration.
  • the compositions can further comprise cellulose, disodium hydrogen phosphate, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hypromellose, lactose, mannitol, and sodium lauryl sulfate.
  • compositions comprising microbial entities is provided in the form of enteric-coated pellets, for oral administration.
  • the compositions can further comprise glyceryl monostearate 40-50, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hypromellose, magnesium stearate, methacrylic acid copolymer type C, polysorbate 80, sugar spheres, talc, and triethyl citrate.
  • a composition comprising microbial entities is provided in the form of enteric-coated granules, for oral administration.
  • the compositions can further comprise carnauba wax, crospovidone, diacetylated monoglycerides, ethylcellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hypromellose phthalate, magnesium stearate, mannitol, sodium hydroxide, sodium stearyl fumarate, talc, titanium dioxide, and yellow ferric oxide.
  • a composition comprising microbial entities can further comprise calcium stearate, crospovidone, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, iron oxide, mannitol, methacrylic acid copolymer, polysorbate 80, povidone, propylene glycol, sodium carbonate, sodium lauryl sulfate, titanium dioxide, and triethyl citrate.
  • compositions provided herein can be in unit-dosage forms or multiple-dosage forms.
  • Unit-dosage forms refer to physically discrete units suitable for administration to human or non-human animal subject in need thereof and packaged individually. Each unit-dose can contain a predetermined quantity of an active ingredient(s) sufficient to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with other pharmaceutical carriers or excipients. Examples of unit-dosage forms include, but are not limited to, ampoules, syringes, and individually packaged tablets and capsules. Unit-dosage forms can be administered in fractions or multiples thereof.
  • a multiple-dosage form is a plurality of identical unit-dosage forms packaged in a single container, which can be administered in segregated unit-dosage form.
  • multiple-dosage forms include, but are not limited to, vials, bottles of tablets or capsules, or bottles of pints or gallons.
  • the multiple dosage forms comprise different pharmaceutically active agents.
  • a multiple dosage form can be provided which comprises a first dosage element comprising a composition comprising a prebiotic and a second dosage element comprising lactose or a probiotic, which can be in a modified release form.
  • a pair of dosage elements can make a single unit dosage.
  • a kit comprising multiple unit dosages, wherein each unit comprises a first dosage element comprising a composition comprising a prebiotic and a second dosage element comprising probiotic, lactose or both, which can be in a modified release form.
  • the kit further comprises a set of instructions.
  • compositions can be formulated in various dosage forms for oral administration.
  • the compositions can also be formulated as a modified release dosage form, including immediate-, delayed-, extended-, prolonged-, sustained-, pulsatile-, controlled-, extended, accelerated-, fast-, targeted-, programmed-release, and gastric retention dosage forms.
  • These dosage forms can be prepared according to known methods and techniques (see, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, supra; Modified-Release Drug Delivery Technology, Rathbone et al., Eds., Drugs and the Pharmaceutical Science, Marcel Dekker, Inc.: New York, N.Y., 2002; Vol. 126, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety).
  • the compositions are in one or more dosage forms.
  • a composition can be administered in a solid or liquid form.
  • solid dosage forms include but are not limited to discrete units in capsules or tablets, as a powder or granule, or present in a tablet conventionally formed by compression molding.
  • Such compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the three or more agents and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the molded tablets can be optionally coated or scored, having indicia inscribed thereon and can be so formulated as to cause immediate, substantially immediate, slow, controlled or extended release of a composition comprising a prebiotic.
  • dosage forms of the invention can comprise acceptable carriers or salts known in the art, such as those described in the Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, American Pharmaceutical Association (1986), incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • an effective amount of a composition comprising microbial entities is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition comprising a homogeneous mixture of compounds described herein.
  • a composition comprising microbial entities can be formulated, in the case of caplets, capsules or tablets, to be swallowed whole, for example with water.
  • compositions described herein can be in liquid form.
  • the liquid formulations can comprise, for example, an agent in water-in-solution and/or suspension form; and a vehicle comprising polyethoxylated castor oil, alcohol, and/or a polyoxyethylated sorbitan mono-oleate with or without flavoring.
  • Each dosage form comprises an effective amount of an active agent and can optionally comprise pharmaceutically inert agents, such as conventional excipients, vehicles, fillers, binders, disintegrants, pH adjusting substances, buffer, solvents, solubilizing agents, sweeteners, coloring agents, and any other inactive agents that can be included in pharmaceutical dosage forms for oral administration. Examples of such vehicles and additives can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th edition (1985).
  • compositions e.g., pharmaceutical composition, medical food or solid food stuff
  • the compositions described herein can be in a solid, semi-solid, liquid, or gel state at room temperature.
  • the compositions described herein can be formulated for administration as an infant formula, an elderly nutritional formula, a prenatal nutrition formula, an athletic performance formula, a ready-to-use therapeutic food formula, or an athletic recovery formula.
  • an effective amount of a microbial entity described herien can be dispersed uniformly in one or more excipients, for example, using high shear granulation, low shear granulation, fluid bed granulation, or by blending for direct compression.
  • Excipients include diluents, binders, disintegrants, dispersants, lubricants, glidants, stabilizers, surfactants and colorants.
  • Diluents, also termed “fillers,” can be used to increase the bulk of a tablet so that a practical size is provided for compression.
  • Non-limiting examples of diluents include lactose, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, mannitol, dry starch, hydrolyzed starches, powdered sugar, talc, sodium chloride, silicon dioxide, titanium oxide, dicalcium phosphate dihydrate, calcium sulfate, calcium carbonate, alumina and kaolin. Binders can impart cohesive qualities to a tablet formulation and can be used to help a tablet remain intact after compression.
  • Non-limiting examples of suitable binders include starch (including corn starch and pregelatinized starch), gelatin, sugars (e.g., glucose, dextrose, sucrose, lactose and sorbitol), celluloses, polyethylene glycol, waxes, natural and synthetic gums, e.g., acacia, tragacanth, sodium alginate, and synthetic polymers such as polymethacrylates and polyvinylpyrrolidone.
  • Lubricants can also facilitate tablet manufacture; non-limiting examples thereof include magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, stearic acid, glyceryl behenate, and polyethylene glycol.
  • Disintegrants can facilitate tablet disintegration after administration, and non-limiting examples thereof include starches, alginic acid, crosslinked polymers such as, e.g., crosslinked polyvinylpyrrolidone, croscarmellose sodium, potassium or sodium starch glycolate, clays, celluloses, starches, gums and the like.
  • suitable glidants include silicon dioxide, talc, and the like.
  • Stabilizers can inhibit or retard drug decomposition reactions, including oxidative reactions.
  • Surfactants can also include and can be anionic, cationic, amphoteric or nonionic.
  • the tablets can also comprise nontoxic auxiliary substances such as pH buffering agents, preservatives, e.g., antioxidants, wetting or emulsifying agents, solubilizing agents, coating agents, flavoring agents, and the like.
  • a softgel formulation is made with a gelatin mass for the outer shell, and a composition including one or more substances, for example microbial entities, for the capsule fill can be prepared.
  • a composition including one or more substances, for example microbial entities, for the capsule fill can be prepared.
  • gelatin powder can be mixed with water and glycerin, heated, and stirred under vacuum.
  • Additives, for example, flavors or colors, can be added to molten gelatin using a turbine mixer and transferred to mobile vessels.
  • the gelatin mass can be kept in a steam-jacketed storage vessel at a constant temperature.
  • the encapsulation process can begin when the molten gel is pumped to a machine and two thin ribbons of gel are formed on either side of machine. These ribbons can then pass over a series of rollers and over a set of die that determine the size and shapes of capsules.
  • a fill composition for example a prebiotic and/or probiotic fill composition, can be fed to a positive displacement pump, which can dose the fill and inject it between two gelatin ribbons prior to sealing them together through the application of heat and pressure.
  • the capsules can pass through a conveyer into tumble dryers where a portion of the water can be removed.
  • the capsules can then be placed on, for example, trays, which can be stacked and transferred into drying rooms. In the drying rooms, dry air can be forced over capsules to remove any excess moisture.
  • Immediate-release formulations of an effective amount of a composition comprising microbial entities can comprise one or more combinations of excipients that allow for a rapid release of a pharmaceutically active agent (such as from 1 minute to 1 hour after administration).
  • an excipient can be microcrystalline cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sodium starch glycolate, corn starch, colloidal silica, Sodium Laurel Sulphate, Magnesium Stearate, Prosolve SMCC (HD90), croscarmellose Sodium, Crospovidone NF, Avicel PH200, and combinations of such excipients.
  • Controlled-release formulations (also referred to as sustained release (SR), extended-release (ER, XR, or XL), time-release or timed-release, controlled-release (CR), or continuous-release) refer to the release of a prebiotic composition from a dosage form at a particular desired point in time after the dosage form is administered to a subject.
  • Controlled-release formulations can include one or more excipients, including but not limited to microcrystalline cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sodium starch glycolate, corn starch, colloidal silica, Sodium Laurel Sulphate, Magnesium Stearate, Prosolve SMCC (HD90), croscarmellose Sodium, Crospovidone NF, or Avicel PH200.
  • controlled-release includes sustained but otherwise complete release.
  • a sudden and total release in the large intestine at a desired and appointed time or a release in the intestines such as through the use of an enteric coating are both considered controlled-release.
  • Controlled-release can occur at a predetermined time or in a predetermined place within the digestive tract. It is not meant to include a passive, uncontrolled process as in swallowing a normal tablet. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • a controlled release dosage form begins its release and continues that release over an extended period of time. Release can occur beginning almost immediately or can be sustained. Release can be constant, can increase or decrease over time, can be pulsed, can be continuous or intermittent, and the like. Generally, however, the release of at least one pharmaceutically active agent from a controlled-release dosage form will exceed the amount of time of release of the drug taken as a normal, passive release tablet. Thus, for example, while all of at least one pharmaceutically active agent of an uncoated aspirin tablet should be released within, for example, four hours, a controlled-release dosage form could release a smaller amount of aspirin over a period of six hours, 12 hours, or even longer. Controlled-release in accordance with the compositions and methods described herein generally means that the release occurs for a period of six hours or more, such as 12 hours or more.
  • a controlled release dosage refers to the release of an agent, from a composition or dosage form in which the agent is released according to a desired profile over an extended period of time.
  • controlled-release results in dissolution of an agent within 20-720 minutes after entering the stomach.
  • controlled-release occurs when there is dissolution of an agent within 20-720 minutes after being swallowed.
  • controlled-release occurs when there is dissolution of an agent within 20-720 minutes after entering the intestine.
  • controlled-release results in substantially complete dissolution after at least 1 hour following administration. In certain embodiments, controlled-release results in substantially complete dissolution after at least 1 hour following oral administration.
  • controlled-release compositions allow delivery of an agent to a subject in need thereof over an extended period of time according to a predetermined profile.
  • Such release rates can provide therapeutically effective levels of agent for an extended period of time and thereby provide a longer period of pharmacologic or diagnostic response as compared with conventional rapid release dosage forms.
  • Such longer periods of response provide for many inherent benefits that are not achieved with immediate-release dosages.
  • controlled-release refers to wherein all or less than all of the total amount of a dosage form, made according to methods and compositions described herein, delivers an active agent over a period of time greater than 1 hour.
  • controlled-release refers to delayed release of an agent, from a composition or dosage form in which the agent is released according to a desired profile in which the release occurs after a period of time.
  • compositions described herein can be administered at a substantially lower daily dosage level than immediate-release forms.
  • the controlled-release layer is capable of releasing 30 to 40% of the one or more active agents (e.g., e.g., a microbial entity) contained therein in the stomach of a subject in need thereof in 5 to 10 minutes following oral administration.
  • the controlled-release layer is capable of releasing 90% of the one or more active agents (e.g., a microbial entity) is released in 40 minutes after oral administration.
  • the controlled-release layer comprises one or more excipients, including but not limited to silicified microcrystalline cellulose (e.g., HD90), croscarmellose sodium (AC-Di-Sol), hydroxyl methyl propyl cellulose, magnesium stearate, or stearic acid.
  • a controlled release formulation weighs between 100 mg to 3 g.
  • compositions suitable for administration of the compounds provided herein include all such carriers known to those skilled in the art to be suitable for the particular mode of administration.
  • the compositions can one or more components that do not impair the desired action, or with components that supplement the desired action, or have another action.
  • an effective amount of the microbial entity is formulated in an immediate release form.
  • the immediate-release form can be included in an amount that is effective to shorten the time to its maximum concentration in the blood.
  • certain immediate-release pharmaceutical preparations are taught in United States Patent Publication US 2005/0147710A1 entitled, “Powder Compaction and Enrobing,” which is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference.
  • the dosage forms described herein can also take the form of pharmaceutical particles manufactured by a variety of methods, including but not limited to high-pressure homogenization, wet or dry ball milling, or small particle precipitation (nano spray).
  • Other methods to make a suitable powder formulation are the preparation of a solution of active ingredients and excipients, followed by precipitation, filtration, and pulverization, or followed by removal of the solvent by freeze-drying, followed by pulverization of the powder to the desired particle size.
  • the dosage form can be an effervescent dosage form.
  • Effervescent means that the dosage form, when mixed with liquid, including water and saliva, evolves a gas.
  • Some effervescent agents (or effervescent couple) evolve gas by means of a chemical reaction which takes place upon exposure of the effervescent disintegration agent to water or to saliva in the mouth. This reaction can be the result of the reaction of a soluble acid source and an alkali monocarbonate or carbonate source. The reaction of these two general compounds produces carbon dioxide gas upon contact with water or saliva.
  • An effervescent couple (or the individual acid and base separately) can be coated with a solvent protective or enteric coating to prevent premature reaction.
  • the acid sources can be any which are safe for human consumption and can generally include food acids, acid and hydrite antacids such as, for example: citric, tartaric, amalic, fumeric, adipic, and succinics.
  • Carbonate sources include dry solid carbonate and bicarbonate salt such as, preferably, sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, potassium bicarbonate and potassium carbonate, magnesium carbonate and the like. Reactants which evolve oxygen or other gasses and which are safe for human consumption are also included. In an embodiment citric acid and sodium bicarbonate are used.
  • the dosage form can be in a candy form (e.g., matrix), such as a lollipop or lozenge.
  • a candy form e.g., matrix
  • an effective amount of a prebiotic is dispersed within a candy matrix.
  • the candy matrix comprises one or more sugars (such as dextrose or sucrose).
  • the candy matrix is a sugar-free matrix.
  • Conventional sweeteners such as sucrose can be utilized, or sugar alcohols suitable for use with diabetic patients, such as sorbitol or mannitol can be employed.
  • Other sweeteners, such as the aspartame can also be easily incorporated into a composition in accordance with compositions described herein.
  • the candy base can be very soft and fast dissolving, or can be hard and slower dissolving.
  • Various forms will have advantages in different situations.
  • a candy mass composition comprising an effective amount of the microbial entities can be orally administered to a subject in need thereof so that an effective amount of the microbial entities will be released into the subject's mouth as the candy mass dissolves and is swallowed.
  • a subject in need thereof includes a human adult or child.
  • a candy mass is prepared that comprises one or more layers which can comprise different amounts or rates of dissolution of the microbial entity.
  • a multilayer candy mass (such as a lollipop) comprises an outer layer with a concentration of the microbial entity differing from that of one or more inner layers.
  • a matrix that dissolves quickly can deliver drug into the subject's mouth for absorption more quickly than a matrix that is slow to dissolve.
  • a candy matrix that contains the prebiotic in a high concentration can release more of the prebiotic in a given period of time than a candy having a low concentration.
  • a candy matrix such as one disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,671,953 or US Application Publication No. 2004/0213828 (which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety) is used to deliver the prebiotic.
  • the dosage forms described herein can also take the form of pharmaceutical particles manufactured by a variety of methods, including but not limited to high-pressure homogenization, wet or dry ball milling, or small particle precipitation (e.g., nGimat's NanoSpray).
  • Other methods useful to make a suitable powder formulation are the preparation of a solution of active ingredients and excipients, followed by precipitation, filtration, and pulverization, or followed by removal of the solvent by freeze-drying, followed by pulverization of the powder to the desired particle size.
  • the pharmaceutical particles have a final size of 3-1000 ⁇ M, such as at most 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1000 ⁇ M.
  • the pharmaceutical particles have a final size of 10-500 ⁇ M.
  • the pharmaceutical particles have a final size of 50-600 ⁇ M.
  • the pharmaceutical particles have a final size of 100800 ⁇ M.
  • an oral dosage form (such as a powder, tablet, or capsule) comprising a prebiotic composition comprising 0.7 g of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide, 0.2 g of lactose, 0.01 g of glucose, 0.01 g of galactose, 0.1-0.2 g of a binder, 0.1-0.2 g of a dispersant, 0.1-0.2 g of a solubilizer, wherein the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide are composed of 1-25% disaccharides, 1-25% trisaccharides, 1-25% tetrasaccharides, and 1-25% pentasaccharides.
  • the oral dosage form can be in the form of a powder, capsule, or tablet. Suitable amounts of binders, dispersants, and solubilizers are known in the art for preparation of oral tablets or capsules.
  • an oral dosage form (such as a powder, tablet or capsule) comprising microbial entities comprising 1-99.9% by weight of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide 0.5-20% by weight of lactose, 0.1-2% by weight of glucose, 0.1-2% by weight of galactose, 0.05-2% by weight of a binder, 0.05-2% by weight of a dispersant, 0.05-2% by weight of a solubilizer, wherein the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide are composed of 1-25% by weight disaccharides, 1-25% by weight trisaccharides, 1-25% by weight tetrasaccharides, and 1-25% by weight pentasaccharides.
  • an oral dosage form (such as a powder, tablet, or capsule) comprising microbial entities comprising 1, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 95, 99.5, 100% by weight of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide 0, 5, 10, 15, or 20% by weight of lactose, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of glucose, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of galactose, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of a binder, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of a dispersant, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of a solubilizer, wherein the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide are composed of 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25% by weight disaccharides, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25% by weight trisaccharides, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, or
  • an oral dosage form comprising a composition comprising microbial entities, wherein the oral dosage form is a syrup.
  • the syrup can comprise 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, or 85% solid.
  • the syrup can comprise 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, or 50% liquid, for example, water.
  • the syrup can comprise a composition comprising microbial entities.
  • the syrup can be, for example, 1-96%, 10-96%, 20-96%, 30-96%, 40-96%, 50-96%, 60-96%, 70-96%, 80-96%, or 90-96% microbial entities.
  • the syrup can be, for example, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, or 96% microbial entities.
  • a composition comprises FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • the softgel capsule is 0.25 mL, 0.5 mL, 1.0 mL, 1.25 mL, 1.5 mL, 1.75 mL, or 2.0 mL.
  • a softgel capsule comprises 0.1 g to 2.0 g of prebiotic composition.
  • a softgel capsule comprises 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, or 2.0 g of a prebiotic composition.
  • a softgel capsule comprises FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide and inulin or FOS.
  • the composition is delivered in a gelatin capsule containing an amount of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide within the ranges listed in Table 2.
  • the number of pills taken per day is within the ranges listed in Table 2.
  • GOS Dosing Units Exemplary GOS Composition Dosages in Gel Caps GOS/ # pills Size Pill (g) per day 000 1-2 1-15 00 0.6-1.5 1-25 0 0.4-1.1 1-38 1 0.3-0.8 1-50 2 0.25-0.6 1-60 3 0.2-0.5 1-75 4 0.14-0.3 1-837
  • a composition that does not contain a preservative. In another embodiment, a composition is provided that does not contain an antioxidant. In another embodiment, a composition is provided that does not contain a preservative or an antioxidant. In an embodiment, a composition comprising FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide does not contain a preservative or an antioxidant.
  • a composition is formulated as a viscous fluid.
  • a composition is formulated such that its water content is low enough that it does not support microbial growth.
  • this composition is an intermediate-moisture food, with a water activity between 0.6 and 0.85; in another embodiment this composition is a low-moisture food, with a water activity less than 0.6.
  • Low-moisture foods limit microbial growth significantly and can be produced by one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, these products could be produced similarly to a liquid-centered cough drop.
  • a prebiotic composition is formulated as a viscous fluid without a preservative in a gel capsule.
  • a composition comprising FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide is a viscous fluid.
  • a composition comprises a high percentage of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide that does not support microbial growth.
  • the composition comprises FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide and inulin or FOS.
  • an oral dosage form comprising a composition comprising microbial entities, wherein the oral dosage form is a softgel.
  • the softgel comprises a syrup.
  • the syrup comprises a composition comprising microbial entities.
  • the composition comprises FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • the composition comprises more than 80% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • the composition comprises between 80-99.9% FOS, GOS, or other.
  • the composition comprises more than 80% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • the composition comprises 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, or 99.9% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is formulated for delivery in a soft gel capsule.
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition formulated for delivery in a soft gel capsule is a high percentage FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition, such as a 90-100% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition (e.g., 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 or 100% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition by weight).
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition formulated for delivery in a soft gel capsule comprises 95% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition formulated for delivery in a soft gel capsule comprises 96% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is formulated such that its water content is low enough that it does not support microbial growth.
  • the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is formulated as a viscous fluid without a preservative in a gel capsule.
  • the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is formulated as a viscous fluid without an antioxidant in a gel capsule.
  • the soft gel capsule comprises 0.1-2 g of a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition.
  • a composition described can be formulated as described, in U.S. Pat. No. 6,750,331, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • a composition can be formulated to comprise an oligosaccharide, a foaming component, a water-insoluble dietary fiber (e.g., cellulose or lignin), or a neutralizing component.
  • a composition comprises a prebiotic fiber.
  • a composition can be in the form of a chewable tablet.
  • a foaming component can be at least one member selected from the group consisting of sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium carbonate, and calcium carbonate.
  • a neutralizing component can be at least one member selected from the group consisting of citric acid, L-tartaric acid, fumaric acid, L-ascorbic acid, DL-malic acid, acetic acid, lactic acid, and anhydrous citric acid.
  • a water-insoluble dietary fiber can be at least one member selected from the group consisting of crystalline cellulose, wheat bran, oat bran, cone fiber, soy fiber, and beet fiber.
  • the formulation can contain a sucrose fatty acid ester, powder sugar, fruit juice powder, and/or flavoring material.
  • Formulations of the provided invention can include additive components selected from various known additives.
  • additives include, for example, saccharides (excluding oligosaccharides), sugar alcohols, sweeteners and like excipients, binders, disintegrators, lubricants, thickeners, surfactants, electrolytes, flavorings, coloring agents, pH modifiers, fluidity improvers, and the like.
  • additives include wheat starch, potato starch, corn starch, dextrin and like starches; sucrose, glucose, fructose, maltose, xylose, lactose and like saccharides (excluding oligosaccharides); sorbitol, mannitol, maltitol, xylitol and like sugar alcohols; calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate and like excipients; starch, saccharides, gelatin, gum arabic, dextrin, methyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, hydroxypropylcellulose, xanthan gum, pectin, gum tragacanth, casein, alginic acid and like binders and thickeners; leucine, isoleucine, L-valine, sugar esters, hardened oils, stearic acid, magnesium stearate, talc, macrogols and like lubricants; CMC, CMC-Na
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is a chewable oral dosage formulation.
  • the chewable formulation can comprises between 1-99.9% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 80% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide 5% L-ascorbic acid, 2% anhydrous citric acid, 3% sodium hydrogencarbonate, 3% calcium carbonate, 2% sucrose fatty acid, 3% fruit juice powder, and 2% potassium carbonate.
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 85% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide, 5% L-ascorbic acid, 3% sodium hydrogencarbonate, 2% sodium carbonate, 2% sucrose fatty acid ester, 2% fruit juice powder, and 1% potassium carbonate.
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 90% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide, 2% L-ascorbic acid, 1% anhydrous citric acid, 2% sodium hydrogencarbonate, 2% sodium carbonate, 2% sucrose fatty acid ester, and 1% potassium carbonate.
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 95% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide, 2% L-ascorbic acid, 1% sodium hydrogencarbonate, and 2% fruit juice powder.
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 95% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide and 5% of L-ascorbic acid, anhydrous citric acid, sodium hydrogencarbonate, calcium carbonate, sucrose fatty acid, fruit juice powder, or potassium carbonate.
  • a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 95% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide and 5% of L-ascorbic acid, anhydrous citric acid, sodium hydrogencarbonate, calcium carbonate, sucrose fatty acid, fruit juice powder, and potassium carbonate.
  • the microbial entities according to the present invention that is to be given to an individual, administration is preferably in a “therapeutically effective amount” that is sufficient to show benefit to the individual.
  • a “prophylactically effective amount” can also be administered, when sufficient to show benefit to the individual.
  • the actual amount administered, and rate and time-course of administration, will depend on the nature and severity of protein aggregation disease being treated. Prescription of treatment, e.g. decisions on dosage etc, is within the responsibility of general practitioners and other medical doctors, and typically takes account of the disorder to be treated, the condition of the individual patient, the site of delivery, the method of administration and other factors known to practitioners. Examples of the techniques and protocols mentioned above can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16th edition, Osol, A. (ed), 1980.
  • An alternate embodiment of the present disclosure is a formulation as a medical food.
  • the consuming public has come to understand that foods possess more than basic nutrition (protein, carbohydrate, fat, etc). For example, 95% of consumers agree that “certain foods have health benefits that go beyond basic nutrition and may reduce the risk of disease or other health concerns.” More than 50% of consumers believe that foods can replace the use of drugs. Replacing the use of drugs may have the benefit of reducing the incidence of adverse side effects suffered by patients following a pharmaceutical drug treatment regimen.
  • medical foods are assumed to be generally safe, as people have historically consumed these foods safely in non-medical contexts.
  • compositions of the invention may be administered under the supervision of a medical specialist, or may be self-administered.
  • Medical foods could take the form of nutritional shakes or other liquids or meal replacements.
  • Medical foods of the present invention could also take the form of a powder capable of being consumed upon addition to suitable food or liquid.
  • Medical foods could also take the form of a pill, tablet or capsule.
  • a medical food formulation of the present disclosure could confer benefits of a synthetic composition of microbes isolated from nutritionally beneficial plants, as well as the benefits of prebiotics, or other nutritionally beneficial inclusions, but not consumed to obtain nutrition from them but rather to provide a metabolic function different than a foodstuff.
  • medical foods of the disclosure may also include at least one vitamin, or vitamin precursor.
  • Preferred vitamins possess antioxidant properties and include vitamins A, C and E, and/or their biochemical precursors.
  • Another embodiment of the medical foods of the invention also includes at least one trace element, preferably selected from the group consisting of zinc, manganese and selenium.
  • Medical foods of the disclosure also may include at least one additional antioxidant selected from the group consisting of carotenoids, N-acetylcysteine and L-glutamine. It is known to those of skill in the art how to construct medical foods containing these elements.
  • Medical foods of the present disclosure would include effective doses of microbial entities deemed useful for the indication and effective doses of any vitamin, prebiotic, or other beneficial additive not consumed to obtain nutrition but to add a therapeutic benefit mediated by the production of SCFA or other immuno-stimulant molecules when passing through the GI tract.
  • the composition comprising the microbial entities is a solid foodstuff.
  • a solid foodstuff include without limitation a food bar, a snack bar, a cookie, a brownie, a muffin, a cracker, a biscuit, a cream or paste, an ice cream bar, a frozen yogurt bar, and the like.
  • the compositions disclosed herein are incorporated into a therapeutic food.
  • the therapeutic food is a ready-to-use food that optionally contains some or all essential macronutrients and micronutrients.
  • the compositions disclosed herein are incorporated into a supplementary food that is designed to be blended into an existing meal.
  • the supplemental food contains some or all essential macronutrients and micronutrients.
  • compositions disclosed herein are blended with or added to an existing food to fortify the food's protein nutrition. Examples include food staples (grain, salt, sugar, cooking oil, margarine), beverages (coffee, tea, soda, beer, liquor, sports drinks), snacks, sweets and other foods.
  • the dietary supplements and medical foods of the present disclosure are consumed at least once daily, and preferably administered two times per day, preferably once in the morning and once in the afternoon.
  • a typical treatment regime for the dietary supplements or medical foods will continue for four to eight weeks. Depending on such factors as the medical condition being treated and the response of the patient, the treatment regime may be extended.
  • a medical food of the present invention will typically be consumed in two servings per day as either a meal replacement or as a snack between meals.
  • compositions of the disclosure can potentially benefit from ingesting the compositions of the disclosure. It is believed to be possible to effectively ameliorate symptoms and conditions associated with immune system disorders and other indications described herein with natural compounds, which do not show any severe side effects. Furthermore, the present methods are expected to be well-tolerated, for example without causing any discomfort or nausea, and simple to apply.
  • disclosed herein are methods of improving immune health, comprising administering to a subject an effective amount of a composition comprising viable microbes disclosed herein.
  • the method of improving immune health comprises administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising viable microbes, comprising:
  • compositions comprising viable microbes comprising:
  • compositions comprising:
  • described herein are methods of reducing inflammation in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject and effective amount of a composition comprising viable microbes described herein.
  • the method of inhibiting inflammation comprises: administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising:
  • a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 43
  • a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 285
  • a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 284
  • a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:
  • the method results in higher circulating levels of at least one anti-inflammatory marker and/or lower circulating levels of at least one inflammation-associated marker in the human subject.
  • the human subject has lower circulating levels of at least one anti-inflammatory marker and/or higher circulating levels of at least one inflammation-associated marker prior to administration of the composition.
  • described herein are methods of treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an immune system disorder, comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or food stuff) described herein.
  • a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or food stuff
  • the immune system disorder is the immune system disorder is selected from the group consisting of allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, allergic bronchial asthma, atopic eczema, anaphylaxis, insect sting, drug allergy, food allergy, asthma, eczema, a disorder or condition associated with a pathological Th17 activity, and combinations thereof.
  • described herein are methods of reducing the level and/or activity of at least one inflammatory cytokine comprising administering an effective dose to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein.
  • a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff
  • described herein are methods of reducing the level and/or activity of at least one inflammatory cytokine associated with aging comprising administering an effective dose to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein.
  • described herein are methods of treating or preventing inflammation or a condition associated with inflammation comprising administering an effective dose to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein.
  • a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff
  • the inflammatory cytokine is one from Table 8
  • the inflammatory cytokine is reduced in the serum or select tissue of the human subject after administration of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or food stuff) compared to a level and/or activity of the at least one inflammatory cytokine from Table 8 prior to administration of the composition (e.g., pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or food stuff).
  • described herein are methods of treating or preventing at least one symptom of a rheumatic disease comprising administering an effective dose to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein.
  • a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff
  • the rheumatic disease is rheumatoid arthritis, spondyloarthritis, or psoriasis.
  • the rheumatic disease is rheumatoid arthritis.
  • the symptom of rheumatic disease is selected from synovial hyperplasia, articular cartilage damage, damage to the metaphyseal bone, or combinations thereof.
  • described herein are methods of treating or preventing periodontal disease comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition described herein.
  • the compositions described herein can be administered by local administration in the form of a gel, mouthwash, lozenge, paste, medical food or food stuff for the treatment or prevention of periodontal disease.
  • described herein are methods of treating or preventing gastritis comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein.
  • a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff
  • the gastritis is H. pylori -associated gastritis.
  • compositions and methods disclosed herein can be used to treat or prevent osteoarthritis.
  • described herein are methods of treating or preventing osteoarthritis comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein.
  • osteoarthritis refers to the disease also known as osteoarthrosis and degenerative joint disease, characterized by inflammation and damage to, or loss of cartilage in any joint or joints, and joint pain.
  • Clinical standards for diagnosing osteoarthritis in subjects including mammalian subjects such as canines and humans are well known and include for example swelling or enlargement of joints, joint tenderness or pain, decreased range of motion in joints, visible joint deformities such as bony growths, and crepitus. Symptoms can be identified by clinical observation and history, or imaging including MRI and X-ray.
  • Criteria for diagnosing the presence or absence of OA and severity or degree of OA include but are not limited to the ACR Criteria for knee OA (R. Altman et al., Development of criteria for the classification and reporting of osteoarthritis: Classification of osteoarthritis of the knee: Diagnostic and Therapeutic Criteria Committee of the American Rheumatism Association. Arthritis Rheum. August 29(8):1039-1049(1986)), functional status criteria according to WOMAC (N. Bellamy et al., 1988, Validation study of WOMAC: a health status instrument for measuring clinically important patient relevant outcomes to antirheumatic drug therapy in patients with osteoarthritis of the hip or knee.
  • the condition to be treated is osteoarthritis.
  • the condition to be treated is osteoarthritis, and treating the condition further involves administration of any one or combination of known anti-osteoarthritis medications or treatments.
  • these include, but are not limited to, surgery, analgesics, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (aspirin, celecoxib, diclofenac, diflunisal, etodolac, ibuprofen, indomethacin, ketoprofen, ketorolac, nabumetone, naproxen, oxaprozin, piroxicam), menthol, weight loss regimens, physical exercise, acupuncture, narcotics (Codeine, Fentanyl, Hydrocodone, hydroporphone, meperidine, methadone, oxycodone), and physical therapy.
  • compositions of the present disclosure can be administered alone or in combination with other treatments, either simultaneously or sequentially dependent upon the condition to be treated.
  • the compositions of the present disclosure can be used in conjunction with traditional treatments for an immune system disorder or a condition associated with inflammation.
  • the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for reduction of an inflammatory cytokine.
  • the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for rheumatoid arthritis.
  • the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for periodontal disease.
  • the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for gastritis.
  • the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for pathogen associated gastritis (e.g., H. pylori -induced gastritis).
  • a microbial entity for a pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or solid foodstuff for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an immune system disorder comprising a viable microbial population
  • the method comprising: (i) providing a library of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of microbial candidates of different species; and (ii) generating a gene-of-interest database for orthologous genes-of-interest from the different species, wherein the gene-of-interest is selected from genes involved in the metabolism or biogenesis of short chain fatty acid (propionate and butyrate), indole (indole-3-acetic acid and indole propionic acid), Gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), surfactants (surfactin, nisin, fengycin, and iturin), dopamine, secondary bile acids, exopolysaccharide proteins (EPS), omega 3 fatty acids, and combinations thereof
  • a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff
  • a viable microbial population for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an immune system disorder
  • the method comprising: (i) identifying immunomodulatory functions of interest; and (ii) screeing in silico for genes-of-interest to identify microbes with the capacity to produce identified functions of interest using libraries of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of the microbial candidates of different species; and (iii) selecting at least two microbial entity candidates of different species with immunomodulatory function; and (iv) culturing the at least two microbial entities in vitro and detecting formation or activity of an anti-inflammatory product/function in each; and (v) culturing the at least two microbial entities in combination in vitro, collecting supernatatants from the cultures, and treating activated immune cells in vitro with the supernatants and detecting reduction in inflammatory cyto
  • a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff
  • a viable microbial population for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of a rheumatic disease
  • the method comprising: (i) identifying immunomodulatory functions of interest; and (ii) screeing in silico for genes-of-interest to identify microbes with the capacity to produce identified functions of interest using libraries of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of the microbial candidates of different species; and (iii) selecting at least two microbial entity candidates of different species with immunomodulatory function; and (iv) culturing the at least two microbial entities in vitro and detecting formation or activity of an anti-inflammatory product/function in each; and (v) culturing the at least two microbial entities in combination in vitro, collecting supernatatants from the cultures, and treating activated immune cells in vitro with the supernatants and detecting reduction in
  • a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, dietary supplement or nutritional food stuff
  • a viable microbial population for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an periodontal disease
  • the method comprising: (i) identifying immunomodulatory functions of interest; and (ii) screeing in silico for genes-of-interest to identify microbes with the capacity to produce identified functions of interest using libraries of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of the microbial candidates of different species; and (iii) selecting at least two microbial entity candidates of different species with immunomodulatory function; and (iv) culturing the at least two microbial entities in vitro and detecting formation or activity of an anti-inflammatory product/function in each; and (v) culturing the at least two microbial entities in combination in vitro, collecting supernatatants from the cultures, and treating activated immune cells in vitro with the supernatants and detecting reduction in
  • a composition e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, dietary supplement or nutritional food stuff
  • a viable microbial population for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of gastritis
  • the method comprising: (i) identifying immunomodulatory functions of interest; and (ii) screeing in silico for genes-of-interest to identify microbes with the capacity to produce identified functions of interest using libraries of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of the microbial candidates of different species; and (iii) selecting at least two microbial entity candidates of different species with immunomodulatory function; and (iv) culturing the at least two microbial entities in vitro and detecting formation or activity of an anti-inflammatory product/function in each; and (v) culturing the at least two microbial entities in combination in vitro, collecting supernatatants from the cultures, and treating activated immune cells in vitro with the supernatants and detecting reduction in inflammatory
  • Example 1 Microbe Isolation, Bacteria and Fungi
  • Plant-based and fermented foods are rich sources of diverse microbes.
  • a microbial library was developed that contains microbes from these sources as they represent an untapped potential source of novel beneficial microbes.
  • Vegetables typically eaten raw and fermented foods were selected for isolation of microbes of interest. The materials were sourced at the point of distribution in supermarkets selling both conventional and organic farmed vegetables, either washed and ready to eat or without washing. The samples were divided into 50 g portions, thoroughly rinsed with tap water and blended for 30 seconds on
  • the cell suspension containing the plant microbiota, chloroplasts and plant cell debris was centrifuged at slow speed for removing plant material and the resulting supernatant was centrifuged at high speed to pellet microbial cells.
  • the pellet resuspended in a buffer containing a proprietary plant cell lysis buffer consisting of chelating agents such as EDTA or Versetene EDTA-based chelating agents to remove divalent ions and a suitable non-ionic detergent such as Tween-20, Tween 80, Triton X, and washed then with PBS.
  • DNA was extracted using the MagaZorb DNA extraction kit (Promega). DNA quality and concentration were measured using Nanodrop and Picogreen fluorescent quantification.
  • DNA libraries were built using the Nextera XT library preparation kit (Illumina) and DNA sequencing was performed using an Illumina HiSeqX instrument using a 2 ⁇ 150 bp flow cell.
  • Raw paired-end reads were processed for quality control with Solexa QA 56 for trimming and removing of Illumina adaptors using a Phred score >20 and minimum fragment length of 50 bp.
  • Taxonomic annotation at the species level of the microbial community for each sample was metagenome using k-mer analysis with kraken2 (Table 3).
  • SBPs were sampled and inoculated into media that would facilitate the growth of certain types of organisms to generate Solarea Bio enrichments (SBEs).
  • cultivation with plant filtrates or acetate enriched broth can enrich for microbes capable of growth on plant substrates or low pH-tolerant microbes.
  • the sieved samples were also diluted and plated onto media that is non-selective, such as tryptic soy agar, or plated on media that is selective for a given microbial type.
  • media that is non-selective, such as tryptic soy agar, or plated on media that is selective for a given microbial type.
  • fungi can be isolated from a sample by plating on a medium such as potato dextrose agar with added chlorotetracycline to prevent bacterial growth.
  • bacteria can be isolated away from yeast by added selective agents such as cycloheximide to the medium.
  • the highest throughput method of determining microbial therapeutic potential begins with bioinformatic analyses. Through sequencing of isolated microbial candidates, it is possible to identify microbes with potentially beneficial phenotypes.
  • Whole-genome sequencing whole-genome sequencing was performed using the Oxford Nanopore and Illumina systems. Microbes grown in pure culture were centrifuged at 4000 ⁇ rpm for 10 min to remove supernatant. Genomic DNA was isolated from microbial pellets via column-based commercial genomic isolation kits, such as the Zymo Quick-DNA miniprep plus kit. DNA quality and concentration were measured using Nanodrop and Picogreen fluorescent quantification. DNA libraries were built using the Nextera Flex library preparation kit (Illumina) and the Nanopore Genomic DNA by Ligation kit (SQK-LSK110). DNA sequencing was performed using an Illumina MiSeq instrument using a 2 ⁇ 250 bp flow cell and the MinION Oxford Nanopore device.
  • Nextera Flex library preparation kit Illumina
  • SQK-LSK110 Nanopore Genomic DNA by Ligation kit
  • Illumina raw paired-end reads were processed for quality control with Solexa QA (Cox et al. 2010) for trimming and removing of Illumina adaptors using a Phred score >20 and minimum fragment length of 50 bp.
  • Quality-filtered reads were de novo assembled using IDBA-UD (Peng et al. 2012) with pre-corrections and the percent of contamination and genome completeness were assessed based on recovery of lineage-specific marker genes using CheckM (Parks et al. 2015).
  • Nanopore raw sequencing data was converted into a nucleic acid sequence through the “guppy_basecaller” command line software.
  • RNA transcripts from microbial candidates described above may also be sequenced. Microbes grown in pure culture are pelleted as above and the resulting pellet undergoes RNA extraction to isolate the total cellular RNA. RNA isolation is performed using a column-based commercial RNA isolation kit, such as the Zymo Research Quick RNA Microprep kit. Isolated RNA is then treated with DNAse to remove potential contaminating genomic DNA. Following DNAse inactivation at 65° C., the isolated RNA undergoes reverse transcriptase reactions, utilizing universal random primers to produce cDNA of specific products. These cDNA products are sequenced through Nanopore or Illumina based sequencing, as above.
  • prokka The assembled contig information derived from genomic sequencing is input into prokka, which initially identifies the locations of all protein coding sequences, after which coding sequences are annotated as specific genes based on a database of all non-fragment Uniprot entries that have transcript evidence (Apeweiler et al., 2004). identified.
  • prokka The assembled contig information derived from genomic sequencing is input into prokka, which initially identifies the locations of all protein coding sequences, after which coding sequences are annotated as specific genes based on a database of all non-fragment Uniprot entries that have transcript evidence (Apeweiler et al., 2004). identified.
  • the BLAST+ command line application was used.
  • genes-of-interest database was constructed, which contains orthologous genes-of-interest from different species. A non-comprehensive list of genes within this database is included in Table 5. Genes-of-interest have included the gene pathways involved in short chain fatty acid (propionate and butyrate) biogenesis, indole (indole-3-acetic acid and indole propionic acid), Gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), surfactants (surfactin, nisin, fengycin, and iturin), dopamine, secondary bile acids, exopolysaccharide proteins (EPS), and omega 3 fatty acids biosynthesis.
  • GABA Gamma-aminobutyric acid
  • surfactants surfactin, nisin, fengycin, and iturin
  • dopamine secondary bile acids
  • exopolysaccharide proteins EPS
  • Microbes including bacteria and fungi are known to produce compounds with immunomodulatory and anti-inflammatory properties including but not limited to short chain fatty acids (SCFA), indoles and indole derivatives, anti-microbial compounds, neurotransmitters such as GABA, serotonin, and dopamine, extracellular polymeric substances (EPS), biosurfactants, secondary bile acids, and polyunsaturated fatty acids.
  • SCFA short chain fatty acids
  • EPS extracellular polymeric substances
  • biosurfactants secondary bile acids
  • secondary bile acids polyunsaturated fatty acids
  • genes associated with a beneficial metabolite offer significant predictive power for identifying potentially therapeutic microbes. However, it is important to determine the expression levels of these genes to confirm that the beneficial metabolite will actually be produced. Gene expression levels will be determined by quantitative reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (qRT-PCR).
  • qRT-PCR is a standard laboratory technique wherein gene expression is quantified by direct measurement of RNA levels. Microbes grown in pure culture under a variety of conditions and media types. These pure cultures are pelleted by centrifugation at 4000 ⁇ rpm for 10 min and the resulting pellet undergoes RNA extraction to isolate the total cellular RNA as described in Example 2. Additionally, RNA is DNAse treated as in Example 2. The isolated RNA undergoes reverse transcriptase reactions, utilizing universal random primers, to produce complementary DNA (cDNA) of the entire transcriptome. cDNA is then amplified through qPCR using primers specific to the gene-of-interest from Table 5 qPCR directly quantifies the amount of cDNA and thereby the starting quantity of the RNA transcript-of-interest, determining its expression levels.
  • the levels of microbially produced metabolites was examined in vitro. Individual microbes are grown in pure culture, after which the microbially conditioned supernatant were examined for different metabolites including short chain fatty acids, indole derivatives, antimicrobial compounds, and neurotransmitters. Additionally, the ability of microbes to produce extracellular polymeric substances was examined.
  • Short chain fatty acid quantification Short chain fatty acids (SCFA) including acetate, propionate, and butyrate, are produced as a result of anaerobic bacterial fermentation of dietary fibers within the intestine and especially within the colon (Macfarlane et al., 2003).
  • SCFAs have different modes of action on both local and systemic regulation of the immune system. SCFAs regulate and improve the intestinal barrier function by upregulation of the expression of tight junctions (Caffaratti et al., 2021). SCFAs also play an important role in T-cell functioning via regulation of G-protein-coupled receptors (GPCRs) and inhibition of histone deacetylase (HDAC) (Caffaratti et al., 2021).
  • GPCRs G-protein-coupled receptors
  • HDAC histone deacetylase
  • SCFAs are their capacity to promote regulatory T cells (Tregs) which suppress the activity of effector T cells (Postler et al., 2017). SCFA also inhibit the production of proinflammatory cytokines including TNF- ⁇ , IL-6, and IL-1 ⁇ from intestinal macrophages to reduce local and systemic inflammation (Caffaratti et al., 2021).
  • cytokines including TNF- ⁇ , IL-6, and IL-1 ⁇ from intestinal macrophages to reduce local and systemic inflammation.
  • GC gas chromatography
  • Trp tryptophan
  • AhR aryl hydrocarbon receptor
  • Indole derivatives including but not limited to indole, indole acetic acid (IAA), and indole propionic acid (IPA) can modulate the production of IL-22, an important mediator of intestinal homeostasis, as well as suppress the activation of NF- ⁇ B and proinflammatory cytokine production while simultaneously increase the production of or anti-inflammatory cytokines to reduce inflammation in the host (Gao et al., 2018).
  • in vitro studies have demonstrated the ability of indole to reduce TNF- ⁇ mediated activation of NF- ⁇ B, expression of the proinflammatory cytokine IL-8, and induce the production of the anti-inflammatory cytokine IL-10 in HCT-8 cells (Bansal et al., 2010).
  • Antimicrobial compounds such as bacteriocins and antibacterial peptides serve multiple purposes including reducing pathogenic microbes associated with disease pathology and reducing the inflammatory response (Jenab et al., 2020).
  • Bacteriocins such as microcin have been shown to increase the production of anti-inflammatory cytokines in intestinal cell lines co-treated with pathogenic E. coli and downregulating TNF through NF- ⁇ B inhibition (Yu et al., 2018). Further, bacteriocins produced by Lactobacillus rhamnosus with antibacterial effect showed significant inhibitory effects on S.
  • Neurotransmitters Microbially produced neurotransmitters including serotonin, gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), and dopamine affect host physiology and immunity through various mechanisms.
  • Serotonin is synthesized from tryptophan (Trp) through a two-stage enzymatic reaction involving Trp hydroxylase and aromatic amino acid decarboxylase.
  • Trp tryptophan
  • Trp hydroxylase gamma-aminobutyric acid
  • aromatic amino acid decarboxylase aromatic amino acid decarboxylase
  • Th17 cells are an inflammatory T-cell that secrete IL-17 and have been implicated in autoinflammatory diseases including but not limited rheumatoid arthritis (Further, serotonin has been shown to reduce the production of IL-17 from Th17 cells and increase the production of IL-10 from Tregs, promoting an anti-inflammatory environment (Wan et al., 2020).
  • GABA is an inhibitory neurotransmitter in the central nervous system, but also exerts important functions in the immune system. GABA has been shown to macrophage mediated inflammation, and induce the production of Tregs.
  • GABA has also been shown to decrease IL-1 ⁇ mediated inflammation and increase production of tight junctions in epithelial cells, improving intestinal barrier function (Caffaratti et al., 2021, Jin et al., 2011).
  • Dopamine a catecholamine, is abundantly present within the human intestinal tract in part due to microbial production (Sandrini et al., 2015).
  • the bacterium Enterococci faecalis has been shown to produce the neurotransmitter dopamine from the metabolite, L-3,4 dihydroxyphenylalanine (L-dopa) (Villageli ⁇ et al., 2018).
  • dopamine is recognized as a potent immunomodulatory compound (Pinoli et al., 2017; Jenab et al., 2020).
  • Dopamine reduces systemic inflammation through inhibition of the NLRP3 inflammasome, a proinflammatory signaling cascade, associated with robust secretion of proinflammatory mediators (Yan et al., 2015).
  • Dopamine was found to reduce neutrophil mediated reactive oxygen species production, and even inhibit neutrophil activation by the highly potent activator N-formyl-methionyl-leucyl-phenylalanine (Yamazaki et al., 1989).
  • Extracellular polymeric substances are a diverse group of polymers composed mainly of polysaccharides, proteins, and DNA, that have been shown to have potent immunomodulatory effects (Costa et al., 2018, Jin et al., 2019). EPS producing strains have a variety of or health benefits for their hosts including anti-inflammatory, antioxidant, antitumor, and stress-tolerant effects (Jin et al., 2019). EPS from Bacillus subtilis has been shown to induce an anti-inflammatory M2 macrophage response to prevent T-cell mediated diseases (Paynich et al., 2017).
  • EPS from Bifidobacterium longum decreases IFN ⁇ , IL-12, TNF- ⁇ , IL-17, and IL-6 production and protects against the T-cell transfer model of colitis (Hsieh et al., 2020).
  • EPS from Faecalibacterium prausnitzii decreases IFN ⁇ and IL-12 while increasing IL-10 secretion through TLR-2 to attenuate the DSS model of colitis (Hsieh et al., 2020).
  • These are just a few examples of the anti-inflammatory capabilities of microbially produced EPS.
  • microbes were grown on media containing the carbohydrate indicating dyes congo red or aniline blue. The presence of colorimetric changes within the microbial colony and the surrounding media indicates the presence of extracellular polymeric substances as demonstrated previously (Ruhmann et al., 2015). Results for EPS production from a selection of examined organisms can be found in Table 7.
  • Biosurfactants are a class of amphipathic molecule produced by microbes. In nature these substances improve nutrient solubility, which improves nutrient acquisition and absorption. In addition to their benefit to microbes biosurfactants have several features that make them potentially desirable compounds for probiotics (Jenab et al., 2020). Biosurfactants have been shown to have anti-inflammatory properties. The biosurfactant produced by Bacillus licheniformis VS16 has been shown to reduce the expression of pro-inflammatory cytokines, such as TNF- ⁇ and IL-1 ⁇ , while also increasing the expression of the anti-inflammatory cytokines IL-10 and TGF- ⁇ (Giri et al., 2017).
  • pro-inflammatory cytokines such as TNF- ⁇ and IL-1 ⁇
  • surfactin a biosurfactant produced by Bacillus subtilis has been shown to reduce the expression of the pro-inflammatory mediators IL-1 ⁇ , iNOS, and TNF- ⁇ in LPS stimulated macrophages (Zhang et al., 2015).
  • Biosurfactant production by microbes are determined through two methods: blood agar lysis and lipid droplet spreading assays (Morikawa et al., 2000; Mulligan et al., 1984). Pure microbial cultures are grown on sheep blood agar. Agar will be checked daily for signs of hemolysis. Hemolysis indicates the potential presence of a biosurfactant (Mulligan et al., 1984). A lipid droplet spreading assay is utilized to confirm biosurfactant production by that microbe. A hemolysin positive microbial strain is grown in pure liquid culture. 10 ⁇ L of microbe-conditioned supernatant is applied to 40 mL of water overlain with a 10 ⁇ L layer of mineral oil.
  • Bile acids are sterol compounds produced by the human body to assist in the solubilization of lipids and other hydrophobic nutrients within the gastrointestinal tract. Select microbes have been shown to metabolize the human produced primary bile acids, cholic and chenodeoxycholic acid, into secondary bile acids, including but not limited to lithocholic and deoxycholic acid (Heinken et al., 2019). Secondary bile acids have been shown to have anti-inflammatory properties (Fiorucci et al., 2018). Anti-inflammatory properties/effects in a human subject include, but are not limited to reduction in symptoms of acute inflammation such as fever, fatigue, headaches, etc.
  • FXR knockout mice have been shown to have increased expression of pro-inflammatory cytokines: IL-1 ⁇ , IL-2, IL-6, TNF- ⁇ , and IFN ⁇ (Fiorucci et al., 2018; Vavassori et al., 2009). Additionally, TGR5 agonism has been shown to reduce proinflammatory cytokine expression by IFN ⁇ stimulated macrophages (Yoneno et al., 2013).
  • FXR signaling reduces synthesis of the pro-inflammatory mediator prostaglandin E2, while bile acid signaling through TGR5 reduces activation of the NLRP3 inflammasome, a signaling cascade that would otherwise result in further inflammatory signals.
  • LC-MS liquid chromatography-linked mass spectrometry
  • FXR/TGR5-controled genes such as the intestinal bile acid binding protein (IBABP) gene for FXR and caudal-type homeobox 2 (CDX2) for TGR5
  • IBABP intestinal bile acid binding protein
  • CDX2 caudal-type homeobox 2
  • LC-MS is used to differentiate and quantify secondary bile acids. Microbes are grown in the presence of bile acids. The resulting supernatant is harvested and filtered. Supernatants are analyzed by LC-MS to identify and quantify any secondary bile acids that are produced by the microbe of interest.
  • Omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids are unsaturated fatty acids and precursor molecules for the eicosanoid family of immunomodulatory lipid mediators (Gutierrez S, 2019). This family of immunological signaling molecules includes prostaglandins and leukotrienes. These compounds are found in several forms which can be pro-inflammatory or anti-inflammatory. Omega-3 fatty acids, including eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA) and Docosahexaenoic acid (DHA) selectively induce the production of anti-inflammatory prostaglandins, while actively inhibiting the synthesis of the pro-inflammatory mediators prostaglandin E2 and leukotriene B4 (Kang et al., 2008).
  • EPA eicosapentaenoic acid
  • DHA Docosahexaenoic acid
  • omega-6 fatty acids such as arachidonic acid
  • the ratio of omega-3 to omega-6 fatty acids can be diagnostic in determining a microbe's inflammatory profile, where microbes that produce more omega-3 and less omega-6 acids are more anti-inflammatory (Bagga et al., 2003).
  • GC-FID To detect, differentiate, and quantify omega fatty acids GC-FID is used. Pure microbial culture is cultivated in liquid culture. Microbial supernatant is collected and filtered to remove microbes. This supernatant is then analyzed by GC, which has the capability to detect, differentiate, and quantify the omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids within the sample.
  • microbes Following the in silico identification of organisms with therapeutic potential, it is vital to experimentally confirm the desired phenotypes.
  • individual microbes are grown in pure culture. After which, these individual organisms are screened for the appropriate phenotype utilizing several culture-based assays. Microbes are screened directly for their ability to adhere to both mucus and mammalian epithelial cells. Microbially conditioned supernatant is examined for the presence of immunomodulating compounds.
  • Mucoadherence Microbial adherence to the gastrointestinal tract is an important mechanism through which commensal microbes improve gut health. As all mucosal surfaces are covered in a layer of mucus, microbialmicrobe adherence to the mucus, hereafter referred to as mucoadherence, is the first important step in this process. It has been shown that probiotic mucoadherence competitively inhibits pathogen access to binding sites on mucosal surfaces (Walsham et al., 2016). Additionally, mucoadherence is thought to increase retention of probiotic microbes, increasing their potential to benefit the host (Han et al., 2021). To quantify mucoadherence, microbes were labeled with a live cell-compatible fluorescent dye, for example Sybr green.
  • a live cell-compatible fluorescent dye for example Sybr green.
  • microbes were then incubated in mucin conjugated plates. Total microbial fluorescence was measured via spectroscopy. Unbound bacteria were washed away and the fluorescence due to bound bacteria will be measured and used to calculate the percentage of total microbes that are bound to the mucin.
  • Epithelial adherence In addition to mucoaherence the ability of microbes to bind to gut-derived epithelial cells was examined. Like mucoadherence, microbial adherence to epithelial cells has been shown to competitively inhibit epithelial adherence by pathogens, such as Staphylococcus aureus, Escherichia coli , and Enterococcus faecium (Monteagudo-Mera et al., 2019; Walsham et al., 2016; Zhang et al., 2015). Additionally, the close interaction between probiotic microbes and epithelial cells can induce immunological changes in the epithelial cell (Monteagudo-Mera et al., 2019).
  • Caco-2 cells are gut-derived epithelial cells that have been used to study epithelial adherence by probiotic microbes (Grootaert et al., 2011) To determine the ability of microbes to bind to mammalian epithelial cells, microbes were incubated with confluent monolayers Caco-2 epithelial cells. Unbound microbes were then washed off. The epithelial cells were lysed, via a detergent-based lysis buffer, leaving viable bacteria. The surviving microbes were then quantified by plating, resulting in colony forming units (CFUs) bound to the monolayer, which was compared to the number of CFUs incubated in each well to determine the binding efficiency.
  • CFUs colony forming units
  • Immunomodulatory compounds As described in Example 4 microbes were examined for their ability to produce metabolites known to be anti-inflammatory in the host. Strains that were positive for the production of these compounds are prioritized for testing of their anti-inflammatory functionality. To empirically test the immunomodulatory capacity of these prioritized strains in vitro, mammalian immune cells are treated with microbially conditioned supernatant.
  • Human U937 cells are myelocyte lineage cells which can be differentiated into macrophage-like cells with ionophores, such as phorbol 12-myristate 13-acetate (PMA). PMA differentiated U937 macrophages are incubated with microbially conditioned supernatant.
  • the subsequent immune response is analyzed by enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and/or qRT-PCR to quantify the specific cytokines including but not limited to TNF- ⁇ , IL-1 ⁇ , IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-21, IL-22, IL-21, IL-27 IFN ⁇ , G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIF, LIX, MCP-1 that are produced in response to the microbial supernatant.
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
  • the aryl hydrocarbon receptor (AHR) is receptor found on epithelial cells of the gastrointestinal tract that is known to induce anti-inflammatory immune signaling in response to indole derivatives and other microbial metabolites (Postler et al., 2017). Utilizing an AHR reporter system activation of this signaling pathway is examined as previously described (Marinelli et al., 2018). Microbially conditioned supernatant is produced as described in Example 7. This supernatant is then incubated with HT29 human cells containing an AHR luciferase reporter system, wherein the luciferase gene is under the control of an AHR controlled promoter. Supernatant that stimulates AHR signaling induces expression of the luciferase reporter gene. Luciferase activity is measured spectroscopically to quantify AHR signaling induced by the supernatant.
  • AHR aryl hydrocarbon receptor
  • TLR Toll-Like Receptor
  • TLRs are immunological receptors that detect specific microbial molecular patterns. In response to stimulation by their ligands, these receptors can promote pro- and anti-inflammatory responses.
  • TLR heterodimers TLR1/TLR2 and TLR2/TLR6 and the homodimers TLR4 and TLR5. It has been shown that the TLR2-based heterodimers can induce the production of the anti-inflammatory cytokine, IL-10, upon binding to microbial cell wall components (Cario E, 2004; Jang S, 2004; Saraiva M, 2010; Nguyen B, 2020).
  • TLR4 and TLR5 are often thought of as pro-inflammatory receptors
  • studies have indicated that TLR4 activation can lead to secretion of IL-10 resulting in the maturation of regulatory T cells to control the inflammatory response (Higgins S, 2003.
  • TLR5 signaling is critical for maintenance of the epithelial barrier within the gastrointestinal tract. TLR5 activation by commensal bacteria has been shown to inhibit general inflammation within the gut. The loss of TLR5 expression from intestinal epithelial cells has been shown to increase inflammation and epithelial permeability within the gastrointestinal tract (Vijay-Kumar et al., 2007, Chassaing et al., 2015).
  • Reporter cell lines such as the HEK-Blue TLR5 reporter line (Invivogen, San Diego, Ca), are used to demonstrate TLR signaling in response to microbial ligands. Microbes are grown in pure culture. These microbes or microbially-conditioned supernatant are used to treat human cells that contain a reporter gene has been placed under the control of a TLR controlled reporter. When the TLR becomes activated by a microbe or secreted microbial compound, the reporter gene is expressed producing a measurable result.
  • Microbes in nature generally interact with multiple other groups and form consortia that work in synergy, exchanging metabolic products and substrates resulting in thermodynamically favorable reactions as compared to the individual metabolism.
  • the process for plant fiber depolymerization, digestion and fermentation into butyrate is achieved by multiple metabolic groups working in concert.
  • This type of synergy is reproduced in the DMA concept where strains are selected to be combined based on their ability to synergize to produce anti-inflammatory compounds when exposed to substrates such as plant fibers, tryptophan, or sucrose.
  • microbes are with desirable attributes are abundant based on ecological hypotheses.
  • fresh vegetables are known to have anti-inflammatory effects when consumed in a whole-food plant-based diet, and therefore, it is likely they harbor microbes that can colonize the human gut.
  • Selected strains are then cultivated in vitro and their genomes sequenced at 100 ⁇ coverage to assemble, annotate and use in predictive genome-wide metabolic models.
  • Microbes with complementary or predicted synergistic functions are then combined. Drawing from the example strains in tables 6 and Y, a DMA could be assembled from microbes with complementary functions such as Paraclostridium benzoelyticum that produces abundant SCFAs but does not produce any other ant-inflammatory targets and Exiguobacterium sp., which produces IAA, inhibits pathogens, and produces EPS. Alternatively, microbes such as Brevibacterium sp. and Exiguobacterium sp. produce anti-pathogenic elements that could synergize to enhance pathogen killing. These two organisms belong to distinct phyla (actinobacteria and firmicutes respectively), meaning they likely harbor different antimicrobial products which may act via different, complementary mechanisms.
  • Test predicted synergistic combinations in the laboratory for validation Single strains are grown to produce a biomass and the spent growth media removed after reaching late log or stationary phase. The washed cells are then combined in Defined Microbial Assemblages with 2-10 different strains per DMA and incubated using a culture media with prebiotic substances and precursors including but not limited to tryptophan, mono or oligosaccharides, fruit or vegetable powders that promote anti-inflammatory product formation.
  • mice are group housed with 5 mice per cage in individually ventilated cages (IVCs) specifically designed for germ free husbandry. After an acclimation period, baseline samples of feces and blood are collected, and baseline measures of body mass are recorded. After baseline measures are recorded. 18-month-old C57bl/6J male and female are randomly divided into groups and dosed by hi-daily oral gavage of water (negative control), DMA #1 (DMA1), DMA #2 (DMA2), DMA #3 (DMA3), DMA #4 (DMA4), or DMA #5 (DMA5) for a period of 6-weeks.
  • IVCs individually ventilated cages
  • Bi-weekly fecal samples are collected to monitor the functional and taxonomic composition of the gut microbiome over time.
  • fasted animals receive an oral gavage of FITC-dextran, and a blood sample will be collected 4-hours later to measure gut permeability.
  • tissues are collected from each mouse for downstream analysis as follows.
  • DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Research, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA).
  • DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq 51 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2 ⁇ 150 bp paired end run.
  • Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp.
  • Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
  • Gut permeability analysis Following FITC-dextran administration to fasted mice, blood will be retro-orbitally collected after 4 hours, and fluorescence intensity will be measured on fluorescence plates using an excitation wavelength of 493 nm and an emission wavelength of 518 nm as previously described (Thevaranjan et al., 2017).
  • Circulating pro- and anti-inflammatory cytokine analysis Blood is collected from each mouse into EDTA treated tubes at the time of sacrifice, and plasma is separated from cells. Cells are saved for peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis. Plasma samples are analyzed by ELISA or Multiplex assay for circulating inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to CRP, TNF- ⁇ , IL-10, IL-2, IL-4, IL-5, IL 6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, Th-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-17, IL-21, IL-23, IL-27 IFN ⁇ , G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIF, LIX, MCP-1, M-CSF, MIG, MIP-2, MIP-3, RANTES, RANKL and VEGF as previously described (Schott et al., 2018).
  • PBMC peripheral blood mononuclear cell
  • PBMC Peripheral blood mononuclear cell
  • Bone marrow and splenic immune cell analysis Bone marrow aspirates and spleens are collected for immune cell phenotyping by flow cytometry and RNAseq as previously described (Tyagi et al., 2018). Upon collection, samples are split in half and either flash frozen for RNA analysis or immediately processed for flow cytometry. Samples are processed for flow cytometry as described for PBMCs, with the addition that spleens are homogenized either mechanically or enzymatically prior to washing and resuspension in FACS buffer.
  • RNA and protein analysis Two cm sections of proximal colonic tissue and two cm sections of terminal ileum tissue are isolated, split in half, and flash frozen for RNA and protein evaluation of tight junctions and claudins, critical mediators of gut barrier integrity, as well as inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to TNF- ⁇ , IL-17, IFN ⁇ and IL-1 ⁇ .
  • RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR, and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the aforementioned proteins of interest (Li et al., 2016).
  • RA rheumatoid arthritis
  • IVCs individually ventilated cages
  • mice are administered by subcutaneous injection with 100 microliters of an emulsion containing 100 micrograms of type II collagen (CII) in incomplete's Freund's adjuvant supplemented with 4 mg/ml Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra.
  • animals are administered by subcutaneous injection with a booster emulsion containing 100 ⁇ g, of type II collagen in incomplete Freund's adjuvant.
  • mice are dosed by hi-daily oral gavage of water (negative control), DMA #1 (DMA1), DMA #2 (DMA2), DMA #3 (DMA3), DMA #4 (DMA4), or DMA #5 (DMA5).
  • mice are weighed three times per week. From Day 21 until the end of the experiment, animals are scored three times per week for clinical signs of arthritis to include swelling of the hind- and front paws, radio-carpal (wrist) joints and tibio-tarsal (ankle) joints. At the end of the experiment on day 45, mice are euthanized, and tissues are collected from each mouse for downstream analysis as follows.
  • Circulating pro- and anti-inflammatory cytokine analysis Blood is collected from each mouse into EDTA treated tubes at the time of sacrifice, and plasma is separated from cells. Cells are saved for peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis, Plasma samples are analyzed by ELISA or Multiplex assay for circulating inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to CRP, TNF- ⁇ , IL-1 ⁇ , IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-13, IL-15, IL-21, IL-22, IL-23, IL-27 IFN ⁇ , G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIF, LIX, MCP-1, M-CSF, MIG, MIP-1 ⁇ , MIP-1 ⁇ , MIP-2, MIP-3, RANTES, RANKL and VEGF as previously described (Schott et al., 2018).
  • PBMC peripheral blood mono
  • PBMC Peripheral blood mononuclear cell
  • Bone marrow and splenic immune cell analysis Bone marrow aspirates and spleens are collected for immune cell phenotyping by flow cytometry and RNAseq as previously described (Tyagi et al., 2018), Upon collection, samples are split in half and either flash frozen for RNA analysis or immediately processed for flow cytometry. Samples are processed for flow cytometry as described for PBMCs, with the addition that spleens are homogenized either mechanically or enzymatically prior to washing and resuspension in FACS buffer.
  • RNA and protein analysis Two cm sections of proximal colonic tissue and two cm sections of terminal ileum tissue are isolated, split in half, and flash frozen for RNA and protein evaluation of tight junctions and claudins, critical mediators of gut barrier integrity, as well as inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to TNF- ⁇ , IL-17, IFN ⁇ and IL-1 ⁇ .
  • RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR, and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the aforementioned proteins of interest (Li et al., 2016).
  • DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Reserch, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA).
  • DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq S1 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2 ⁇ 150 bp paired end run.
  • Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp.
  • Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
  • Histopathology At the end of the experiment, hind paws are stored in tissue fixative. Samples are transferred into decalcification solution, and tissue samples are processed, sectioned, and stained with Haematoxylin Eosin. Sections are scored by a qualified histopathologist, blind to the experimental design, for signs of arthritis to include inflammation, articular cartilage damage and damage to the underlying metaphyseal bone. A detailed scoring system is used (see below). Data will be graphed (Mean ⁇ SEM). Raw and analysed data will be provided as well as representative pictures.
  • Articular 0 Normal joint cartilage damage Articular 1 Articular cartilage shows cartilage damage only mild degenerative change Early pannus formation may be present peripherally.
  • Articular 2 Articular cartilage shows cartilage damage moderate degenerative change and focal loss. Pannus formation is present focally Articular 3 Significant disruption and cartilage damage loss of articular cartilage with extensive pannus formation Damage to the 0 Normal joint underlying metaphyseal bone Damage to the 1 No change to underlying underlying metaphyseal bone metaphyseal bone Damage to the 2 May be focal necrosis or underlying fibrosis of metaphyseal metaphyseal bone bone. Damage to the 3 Disruption or collapse of underlying metaphyseal bone. Extensive metaphyseal bone inflammation, necrosis or fibrosis extending to medullary space of the metaphysis
  • mice In addition to the mouse model of RA study described above, a delayed type hypersensitivity study for RA is conducted in mice, and is conducted as follows. The studies are conducted in a BSL-1, quarantined room. Mice are acclimated to the facility for 1 week followed by an additional 2 week acclimation with bedding mixing to normalize microbiomes across cages. Fecal microbiome samples are collected 1-2 days prior to mBSA treatment #1. At 8 weeks of age (day 0), animals receive an intra-plantar mBSA (methylated Bovine Serum Albumin) challenge or PBS/Complete fruend's adjuvent (Control) in the right hindpaw.
  • mBSA methylated Bovine Serum Albumin
  • mice At 8 weeks of age (day 0), immediately following mBSA, animals are treated with either DMAs (twice daily) or Dexamethasone (Dex) 5 mg/kg (once daily). Treatment with DMA or Dex is continued until day 8. Mice receiving DMAs are only gavaged in the morning on day 8. On day 8, mice receive an intra-plantar mBSA challenge or PBS/CFA (control) in the right hind paw after Dex or DMA treatment. Paw swelling is measured on day 9. At the end of the study, the following samples/tissues are collected and further characterized as described above.
  • DMAs are identified that reduce paw inflammation and reduce pro-inflammatory cytokine secretion/detection in blood and injected paw samples.
  • mice are group housed with 5 mice per cage in individually ventilated cages (IVCs) specifically designed for germ free husbandry. After an acclimation period, mice are randomly divided into groups, baseline samples of feces, oral microbiome swab, and blood are collected, and baseline measures of body mass are recorded. On Day 0, periodontitis is induced in 12-month-old C57bl/6J male and female mice using the well described ligature induced periodontal disease model (Aghaloo et al., 2011). Briefly, a sterile wire ligature is placed around the crown of the right first maxillary molar to induce the disease process.
  • IVCs individually ventilated cages
  • mice Immediately following induction of periodontitis, mice begin bi-daily dosing by oral gavage with water (negative control), DMA #1 (DMA1), DMA #2 (DMA2), DMA #3 (DMA3), DMA #4 (DMA4), or DMA #5 (DMA5) for a period of 8-weeks.
  • Weekly fecal and oral microbiome samples are collected to monitor the functional and taxonomic composition of the gut and oral microbiome over time, After the 8-week dosing period, tissues are collected from each mouse for downstream analysis as follows.
  • DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Reserch, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA).
  • DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq S1 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2 ⁇ 150 bp paired end run.
  • Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp.
  • Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
  • Metagenomic analysis of oral microbiome samples Bacterial DNA extraction is performed using commercially available DNA purification kit (Epicentre MasterPureTM) according to manufacturer's guidelines and the DNA concentration will be estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA). DNA library preparation, sequencing, and analysis is carried out as described above.
  • Circulating pro- and anti-inflammatory cytokine analysis Blood is collected from each mouse into EDTA treated tubes at the time of sacrifice, and plasma is separated from cells. Cells are saved for peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis. Plasma samples are analyzed by ELISA or Multiplex assay for circulating inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to CRP, TNF- ⁇ , IL-1 ⁇ , IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-13, IL-15, IL-17, IL-21, IL-22, IL-23, IL-27 IFN ⁇ , G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIF, LIX, MCP-1, M-CSF, MIG, MIP-1 ⁇ , MIP-1 ⁇ , MIP-2, MIP-3, RANTES, RANKL and VEGF as previously described (Schott et al., 2018).
  • PBMC Peripheral blood mononuclear cell
  • Bone marrow and splenic immune cell analysis Bone marrow aspirates and spleens are collected for immune cell phenotyping by flow cytometry and RNAseq as previously described (Tyagi et al., 2018). Upon collection, samples are split in half and either flash frozen for RNA analysis or immediately processed for flow cytometry. Samples are processed for flow cytometry as described for PBMCs, with the addition that spleens are homogenized either mechanically or enzymatically prior to washing and resuspension in FACS buffer.
  • RNA and protein analysis Two cm sections of proximal colonic tissue and two cm sections of terminal ileum tissue are isolated, split in half, and flash frozen for RNA and protein evaluation of tight junctions and claudins, critical mediators of gut barrier integrity, as well as inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to TNF- ⁇ , IL-17, IFN ⁇ and IL-1 ⁇ .
  • RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR, and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the aforementioned proteins of interest (Li et al., 2016).
  • Micro-computed tomographic ( ⁇ CT) scanning To analyze amount of alveolar bone loss following ligature induced periodontal disease, jaw bones are imaged by ⁇ CT scanning at 16- ⁇ m resolution, and volumetric data are converted to DICOM format and imported Imaging software to generate 3D and multiplanar reconstructed images. To quantify the amount of bone loss induced by experimental periodontal disease, the imaged volume is oriented with the nasal cavity floor parallel to the horizontal plane and the midpalatal suture parallel to the midsagittal plane. Then the volume is angled such that the long axis of the distal root of the first molar and the mesial root of the second molar are vertical to the horizontal plane.
  • the distance between the cementoenamel junction and the alveolar bone crest are measured at the center of D1 and M2.
  • the imaged volume is oriented such that the floor of the nasal cavity is parallel to the horizontal plane and the midpalatal suture was parallel to the midsagittal plane.
  • the shortest distance from the buccal surface of the root to the buccal outline of the alveolar ridge is measured for the mesial and distal roots of the first and second molars at the level of the hard palate.
  • Histopathology Bones are decalcified in for 4 to 6 days or in 14.5% EDTA (pH 7.2) for 4 weeks. Samples are then embedded in paraffin, and 5- ⁇ m-thick coronal sections at the interproximal area between the first and second maxillary molars are made. Thus each section includes a complete cross section through the entire maxilla, which allows a side-by-side comparison of the bone, teeth, and soft tissues from the ligature (right) and nonligature (left) sites.
  • hematoxylin, and eosin (H&E)-stained slides are digitally scanned using the Aperio XT automated slide scanner and the Aperio ImageScope Version 10 software (Aperio Technologies, Inc., Vista, Calif., USA). Areas of osteonecrosis, defined as loss of more than five contiguous osteocytes with confluent areas of empty lacunae, are marked and the total area are calculated by the ImageScope software.
  • the ruler tool in ImageScope is used to measure the greatest area of buccal periosteal thickness on both the ligature and nonligature sides.
  • Numbers of empty and total osteocytic lacunae are counted manually on the digital whole-slide image over a 1-mm-long and 0.25-mm-wide area of bone (length and width measured with the ImageScope ruler tool) at the buccal alveolus adjacent to the D1 root.
  • RNA and cytokine analysis of periodontal tissue Whole buccal and palatal tissues of maxillary molars are collected. RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR as previously described (Glowackia et al., 2013), and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the cytokines and proteins of interest including but not limited to IL-10, TGF- ⁇ , TNF- ⁇ , cytotoxic T lymphocyte antigen 4 (CTLA-4), and RANKL.
  • CTLA-4 cytotoxic T lymphocyte antigen 4
  • mice are group housed with 5 mice per cage in individually ventilated cages (WC's) specifically designed for germ free husbandry. After an acclimation period, mice are randomly divided into groups, baseline samples of feces, oral microbiome swab, and blood are collected, and baseline measures of body mass are recorded. On Day 0; periodontitis is induced in 12-month-old. C57bl/6J male and female mice using the well described ligature induced periodontal disease model (Aghaloo et al., 2011). Briefly, a sterile wire ligature is placed around the crown of the right first maxillary molar to induce the disease process.
  • a sterile wire ligature is placed around the crown of the right first maxillary molar to induce the disease process.
  • mice Immediately following induction of periodontitis, mice begin hi-daily dosing by brushing onto the oral site with water (negative control), DMA #1 (DMA1), DMA #2 (DMA2), DMA #3 (DMA3), DMA #4 (DMA4), or DMA #5 (DMA5) for a period of 8-weeks.
  • Weekly fecal and oral microbiome samples are collected to monitor the functional and taxonomic composition of the gut and oral microbiome over time. After the 8-week dosing period, tissues are collected from each mouse for downstream analysis as follows.
  • DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Reserch, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA).
  • DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq S1 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2 ⁇ 150 bp paired end run.
  • Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp.
  • Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
  • Metagenomic analysis of oral microbiome samples Bacterial DNA extraction is performed using commercially available DNA purification kit (Epicentre MasterPureTM) according to manufacturer's guidelines and the DNA concentration will be estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA). DNA library preparation, sequencing, and analysis is carried out as described above.
  • Circulating pro- and anti-inflammatory cytokine analysis Blood is collected from each mouse into EDTA treated tubes at the time of sacrifice, and plasma is separated from cells. Cells are saved for peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis. Plasma samples are analyzed by ELISA or Multiplex assay for circulating inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to CRP, TNF- ⁇ , IL-1 ⁇ , IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-17, IL-21, IL-22, IL-23, IL-27 IFN ⁇ , G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIE, LIX. MCP-1, M-CSF, MIG, MIP-1 ⁇ , MIP-1 ⁇ , MIP-2, MIP-3, RANTES, RANKL and VEGF as previously described (Schott et al., 2018).
  • PBMC Peripheral blood mononuclear cell
  • Bone marrow and splenic immune cell analysis Bone marrow aspirates and spleens are collected for immune cell phenotyping by flow cytometry and RNAseq as previously described (Tyagi et al., 2018). Upon collection, samples are split in half and either flash frozen for RNA analysis or immediately processed for flow cytometry. Samples are processed for flow cytometry as described for PBMCs, with the addition that spleens are homogenized either mechanically or enzymatically prior to washing and resuspension in FACS buffer.
  • RNA and protein analysis Two cm sections of proximal colonic tissue and two cm sections of terminal ileum tissue are isolated, split in half, and flash frozen for RNA and protein evaluation of tight junctions and claudins, critical mediators of gut barrier integrity, as well as inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to TNF- ⁇ , IL-17, IFN ⁇ and IL-1 ⁇ .
  • RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR, and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the aforementioned proteins of interest (Li et al., 2016).
  • Micro-computed tomographic ( ⁇ CT) scanning To analyze amount of alveolar bone loss following ligature induced periodontal disease, jaw bones are imaged by ⁇ CT scanning at 16- ⁇ m resolution, and volumetric data are converted to DICOM format and imported Imaging software to generate 3D and multiplanar reconstructed images. To quantify the amount of bone loss induced by experimental periodontal disease, the imaged volume is oriented with the nasal cavity floor parallel to the horizontal plane and the midpalatal suture parallel to the midsagittal plane. Then the volume is angled such that the long axis of the distal root of the first molar and the mesial root of the second molar are vertical to the horizontal plane.
  • the distance between the cementoenamel junction and the alveolar bone crest are measured at the center of D1 and M2.
  • the imaged volume is oriented such that the floor of the nasal cavity is parallel to the horizontal plane and the midpalatal suture was parallel to the midsagittal plane.
  • the shortest distance from the buccal surface of the root to the buccal outline of the alveolar ridge is measured for the mesial and distal roots of the first and second molars at the level of the hard palate.
  • Histopathology Bones are decalcified in for 4 to 6 days or in 14.5% EDTA (pH 7.2) for 4 weeks. Samples are then embedded in paraffin, and 5- ⁇ m-thick coronal sections at the interproximal area between the first and second maxillary molars are made. Thus each section includes a complete cross section through the entire maxilla, which allows a side-by-side comparison of the bone, teeth, and soft tissues from the ligature (right) and nonligature (left) sites.
  • hematoxylin, and eosin (H&E)-stained slides are digitally scanned using the Aperio XT automated slide scanner and the Aperio ImageScope Version 10 software (Aperio Technologies, Inc., Vista, Calif., USA). Areas of osteonecrosis, defined as loss of more than five contiguous osteocytes with confluent areas of empty lacunae, are marked and the total area are calculated by the ImageScope software.
  • the ruler tool in ImageScope is used to measure the greatest area of buccal periosteal thickness on both the ligature and nonligature sides.
  • Numbers of empty and total osteocytic lacunae are counted manually on the digital whole-slide image over a 1-mm-long and 0.25-mm-wide area of bone (length and width measured with the ImageScope ruler tool) at the buccal alveolus adjacent to the D1 root.
  • RNA and cytokine analysis of periodontal tissue Whole buccal and palatal tissues of maxillary molars are collected. RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR as previously described (Glowackia et al., 2013), and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the cytokines and proteins of interest including but not limited to IL-10, TGF- ⁇ , TNF- ⁇ , cytotoxic T lymphocyte antigen 4 (CTLA-4), and RANKL.
  • CTLA-4 cytotoxic T lymphocyte antigen 4
  • mice are group housed with 5 mice per cage in individually ventilated cages (IVCs) specifically designed for germ free husbandry.
  • IVCs individually ventilated cages
  • Adult male and female C57Bl/6J mice are randomly allocated to experimental groups and allowed to acclimate for two weeks. After an acclimation period, baseline samples of feces and blood are collected, and baseline measures of body mass are recorded. On Day 0, animals are infected three times over a 5-day period with a 0.1 ml volume containing 10 8 H. pylori (Sydney strain. SS1) organisms.
  • mice Two weeks following infection, mice are treated by hi-daily oral gavage of water (negative control), triple antibiotic therapy of omeprazole, metronidazole, and clarithromycin (positive control), DMA #1, DMA #2, DMA #3, DMA #4, or DMA #5 for a period of 2-weeks. Fecal samples are collected weekly for metagenoimc analysis. All animals are sacrificed 36 hours after the cessation of treatment for assessment of bacterial colonization by rapid qPCR and histology.
  • Histology One-half of each stomach is placed into 10% buffered formalin and processed in paraffin, and 4- ⁇ m sections will be stained with a modified Steiner silver stain. Colonization is assessed on a five-point scale: 0, no bacteria; 1, less than 1 ⁇ 3 of crypts colonized with 1 to 10 bacteria; 2, 1 ⁇ 3 to 2 ⁇ 3 of crypts colonized with 10 to 20 bacteria; 3, 2 ⁇ 3 of the crypts colonized with >20 bacteria; and 4, all crypts colonized with >20 bacteria as previously described (
  • H. pylori colonization levels in gastric tissue is quantified by PCR with strain specific primers as previously described (Velduyzen van Zanten et al., 2003). Any sample detecting ⁇ 10 copies of the H. pylori genome is considered negative for H. pylori colonization.
  • Inflammatory cytokine quantification by qRTPCR A longitudinal strip of gastric tissue from the greater curvature is isolated, and RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR as previously described (Velduyzen van Zanten et al., 2003) to quantify inflammatory cytokines in the stomach tissue including but not limited to TNF- ⁇ , IL-1 ⁇ , and IFN ⁇ .
  • DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Reserch, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA).
  • DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq S1 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2 ⁇ 150 bp paired end run.
  • Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp.
  • Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
  • Example 10 DMAs Identified with Increased Short Chain Fatty Acids Production
  • U937 monocyte cells were cultivated in suspension in RPMI medium containing 10% FBS, 1 mM Glutamine, 12.5 mM HEPES, 1 ⁇ Anti-Anti (Gibco) at 37° C. 5% CO 2 .
  • Monocytes were differentiated into macrophage-like cells by the addition of 20 nM phorbol 12-myristate 13-acetate (PMA) for 72 hrs, at which the media was replaced with fresh medium without PMA, leaving adherent, differentiated macrophage-like cells. Experimentation proceeded 24 hrs after medium replacement.
  • PMA phorbol 12-myristate 13-acetate
  • microbes were inoculated onto macrophage-like cells at an 1:1 bacterial:macrophage ratio and co-incubated for 8 hrs at 37° C. 5% CO 2 .
  • Supernatants from the cocultures were removed and analyzed for lysis (Cytotox 96, Promega) and IL-10, IL-6, IL-1b and TNF ⁇ release by ELISA (Thermo Fisher) per the manufacturers' protocols. Results as shown in Table 7 were compared to media and agonist (LPS) controls.
  • Microbial titers were measured at the beginning and end of the experiment by dilution plating.
  • TNF ⁇ Tumor Necrosis Factor Alpha
  • Example 12 Reductions in IL-8 in DMA2 and DMA6 vs. Constituent Microbes
  • Intestinal epithelial cells are the first cells to encounter microbes and contribute to the immune response.
  • Epithelial cells can secrete Interleukin 8 (IL-8) and CXCL-1, two chemokines responsible for neutrophil recruitment to sites of inflammation.
  • IL-8 Interleukin 8
  • CXCL-1 two chemokines responsible for neutrophil recruitment to sites of inflammation.
  • DMAs shown in Table 7 were screened for stimulation of secretion of IL-8 and CXCL-1, when cultured with human colorectal adenocarcinoma epithelial cells (HT29 cells).
  • HT29 cells were cultivated in DMEM medium containing 10%1 mM Glutamine, 1 ⁇ Anti-Anti(Gibco) at 37° C. 5% CO 2 .
  • Microbes were inoculated onto epithelial cells at a 1:1 bacterial:macrophage ratio and co-incubated for 16 hrs at 37° C. 5% CO 2 .
  • Supernatants from the cocultures were removed and analyzed for lysis (Cytotox 96, Promega) and IL-8 and CXCL-1 release by ELISA (Thermo Fisher) per the manufacturers' protocols. Results were compared to media and agonist (LPS) controls.
  • Microbial titers were measured at the beginning and end of the experiment by dilution plating.
  • the robust IL-8 response induced by SBI4825 was ameliorated in DMA2 by other microbes present, but not in DMA1 ( FIG. 19 ).
  • the robust IL-8 response induced by SBI4877 was ameliorated in DMA6 by other microbes present, but not in DMA5 ( FIG. 20 ).
  • DMAs shown in Table 7 were screened for secretion of GABA, a neurotransmitter derived from glutamate that has been shown to inhibit T cell responses and reduce proinflammatory cytokine secretion ( FIG. 21 ).
  • DMAs shown in Table 7 were screened for secretion of serotonin, a neurotransmitter that reduces proinflammatory cytokine secretion by macrophages while modulating immune cell recruitment.
  • DMAs were cultured in BHI medium and the amount of serotonin excreted in the culture medium was measured by ELISA.
  • DMAs DMA005 (DMA5), DMA006 (DMA6), DMA010 (DMA10), and DMA012 (DMA12) were capable of producing serotonin.
  • DMA006 (DMA6) produced the largest amount of serotonin ( FIG. 23 ).
  • DMAs were added to macrophages a a ratio of 4:1 (four microbes per one macrophage like cell and coincubated at 37° C., 5% CO 2 for eight hours, and cytokine production, such as interleukin (IL)-1 ⁇ , IL-10, IL-6 and tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNF ⁇ ) was measured by ELISA ( FIG. 26 ).
  • cytokine production such as interleukin (IL)-1 ⁇ , IL-10, IL-6 and tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNF ⁇ ) was measured by ELISA ( FIG. 26 ).
  • Macrophages cultured with DMA005 (DMA5) or DMA006 (DMA6) exhibited a robust production of IL-10, IL-6 and TNF ⁇ .
  • DTH delayed type hypersensitivity
  • mice 8-week old male mice were sensitized on Day-0 by subcutaneous injection of 1 mg/ml methylated bovine serum albumin (mBSA) and 1 mg/ml complete Freund's adjuvant (CFA).
  • mBSA methylated bovine serum albumin
  • CFA complete Freund's adjuvant
  • mice received a second challenge injection of 100 ⁇ g of BSA in 20 ⁇ L of PBS in the plantar surface of the left hind paw.
  • the contra-lateral paw was injected with the same volume of saline alone.
  • the relative swelling was calculated on Day-9 ( FIG. 27 ).
  • DMAs were administered by oral gavage twice daily.
  • Dexamethasone was administered once daily as a positive control for reduction of paw swelling/inflammation. Paw swelling measurements were taken nine days after initial sensitization with mBSA/CFA.
  • DMAs (DMA005, DMA006, DMA010, and DMA012) were selected for screening of anti-inflammatory effects in the DTH model based on their ability to produce the immunomodulatory effectors serotonin, GABA, and acetate in vitro ( FIGS. 25 , 26 , and 27 ), as well as their ability to modulate cytokine production by macrophages in vitro (production of IL-10, TNF ⁇ , IL-6, and/or IL-1 ⁇ ; FIG. 28 ).
  • DMA006 resultsed in a significant reduction in paw swelling compared to vehicle control
  • DMA005 resultsed in a significant reduction in paw swelling compared to vehicle control
  • DMA010 resultsed in trends of reduced swelling ( FIG. 28 ).
  • Example 18 Collagen-Induced Arthritis Mouse Model of Rheumatoid Arthritis for Testing DMAs
  • RA Rheumatoid Arthritis
  • a mouse model of RA is used where collagen is administered to mice to induce arthritis ( FIG. 29 ).
  • Collagen and complete Freund's adjuvant (CFA) are injected into mouse paws on day zero, and mice are administered DMAs twice daily, seven days a week on day 14 by oral gavage for 4 weeks. Paws of mice are monitored for swelling and sample tissue (including blood samples) are collected.
  • Mice administered DMAs show a significant reduction in paw swelling and RA symptoms as well as reduction in pro-inflammatory cytokine production.

Abstract

This disclosure provides for compositions (e.g., pharmaceutical compositions, dietary supplements, medical foods and food stuff), comprising combinations of live microbe populations for the treatment and/or prevention of immune system disorders and conditions related to inflammation, including both pathogen assisted conditions and conditions that are independent of pathogens. Included with the present disclosure are methods for use of the compositions, and methods for selecting microbial entities to formulate the compositions of the disclosure.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/292,362 filed Dec. 21, 2021, and 63/348,854 filed Jun. 3, 2022, each of which is hereby incorporated in its entirety by reference for all purposes.
    • SEQUENCE LISTING
  • The instant application contains a Sequence Listing which has been submitted via Patent Center and is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Said XML, created on Oct. 3, 2022, is named SBI-011US_SL.xml, and is 182,000 bytes in size.
    • BACKGROUND
  • Plant-based and fermented foods are rich sources of diverse microbes. Daily consumption of fresh fruits, vegetables, seeds and other plant-derived ingredients of salads and juices is recognized as part of a healthy diet and associated with weight loss, weight management and overall healthy lifestyles. This is demonstrated clinically and epidemiologically in the “China Study” (Campbell, T. C. and Campbell T. M. 2006. The China Study: startling implications for diet, weight loss and long-term health. Benbella books pp 419) where a lower incidence of inflammatory-related indications were observed in rural areas where diets are whole food plant-based. The benefit from these is thought to be derived from the vitamins, fiber, antioxidants, and other molecules that are thought to benefit the microbial flora through the production of prebiotics. These can be in the form of fermentation products from the breakdown of complex carbohydrates and other plant-based polymers. There has been no clear mechanistic association between microbes in whole food plant-based diets and the benefits conferred by such a diet. The role of these microbes as probiotics, capable of contributing to gut colonization and thereby influencing a subject's microbiota composition in response to a plant-based diet, has been underappreciated.
  • In particular, although it is appreciated that the gut microbiome has important effects on the development and functioning of the immune system, how probiotics modulate the immune system, and which populations are most effective at doing so, is not well understood. Thus, there is a significant need to identify microbes found in plants and fermented foods and produce compositions comprising live microbial populations that can be used to treat and/or prevent immune system disorders, and conditions related to inflammation.
    • SUMMARY
  • In certain aspects, disclosed herein are methods of improving immune health, comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising viable microbes, comprising:
      • (i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus brevis;
      • (ii) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial population comprising Lactococcus lactis;
      • (iii) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial population comprising Bacillus velenzensis; and.
      • (iv) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus harbinensis.
  • In certain aspects, disclosed herein are methods of improving immune health, comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising:
      • (i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 43;
      • (ii) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 285;
      • (iii) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 284; and
      • (iv) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 286.
  • In certain embodiments of any of the foregoing methods, the composition comprises a medical food, nutritional supplement or foodstuff. In certain embodiments of any of the foregoing methods, the composition comprises a pharmaceutical composition.
  • In certain embodiments of any of the foregoing methods, the viable microbes are plant-derived or food-derived. In certain embodiments, improving immune health comprises reducing inflammation in the human subject.
  • In certain aspects, described herein are methods of inhibiting inflammation in a human subject, the method comprising: administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising:
      • (i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 43
      • (ii) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to an 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 285;
      • (iii) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to an 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 284; and
      • (iv) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to an 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 286; wherein the human subject has lower circulating levels of at least one anti-inflammatory marker and/or higher circulating levels of at least one inflammation-associated marker.
  • In certain embodiments of any of the foregoing methods, the methods result higher circulating levels of at least one anti-inflammatory marker and/or lower circulating levels of at least one inflammation-associated marker in the human subject.
  • In certain embodiments of any of the foregoing methods, the composition is capable of producing neurotransmitters selected from the group consisting of serotonin, gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), dopamine, acetylcholine and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the composition is capable of modulating IFNγ, IL-12, TNF-α, IL-17, IL-6, IL-1β, IL-10 or combinations thereof in the human subject. In certain embodiments, at least one microbial entity comprises a first genome; wherein the first genome comprises at least one functional expression sequence at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6. In certain embodiments, at least one microbial entity is capable of producing an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or an enzyme capable of acting on the same substrate as an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6. In certain embodiments, at least one microbial entity comprises a genus of bacteria with a metabolic signature or functionality selected from Tables 5 or 7.
  • In certain embodiments of any of the foregoing methods, at least one microbial entity comprises one or more features selected from the group consisting of:
  • (i) capable of engrafting when administered to a subject,
    (ii) capable of having anti-inflammatory activity,
    (iii) not capable of inducing pro-inflammatory activity,
    (iv) capable of producing a secondary bile acid,
    (v) capable of producing a tryptophan metabolite,
    (vi) capable of restoring epithelial integrity as determined by a primary epithelial cell monolayer barrier integrity assay,
    (vii) capable of being associated with remission of an inflammatory bowel disease,
    (viii) capable of producing a short-chain fatty acid,
    (ix) capable of inhibiting a histone deacetylase (HDAC) activity,
    (x) capable of producing a medium-chain fatty acid,
    (xi) capable of expressing catalase activity,
    (xii) capable of having alpha-fucosidase activity,
    (xiii) capable of inducing Wnt activation,
    (xiv) capable of producing a B vitamin,
    (xv) capable of modulating host metabolism of endocannabinoid,
    (xvi) capable of producing a polyamine and/or modulating a host metabolism of a polyamine,
    (xvii) capable of reducing fecal levels of a sphingolipid,
    (xviii) capable of modulating host production of kynurenine and/or capable of producing kynurenine,
    (xix) capable of reducing fecal calprotectin level,
    (xx) not capable of activating a pattern recognition receptor (PRR) pathway, and optionally, a toll-like receptor (TLR) pathway, a NACHT, LRR, and PYD domains-containing protein 3 (NLRP3) inflammasome pathway, or a C-type lectin receptor pathway and combinations thereof;
    (xxi) capable of activating a PRR pathway, and optionally a TLR pathway, a NLRP3 pathway a C-type lectin receptor pathway, and combinations thereof;
    (xxii) not capable of producing ursodeoxycholic acid,
    (xxiii) capable of not being associated with clinical non-remission of an inflammatory bowel disease,
    (xxiv) capable of inhibiting apoptosis of intestinal epithelial cells,
    (xxv) capable of inducing an increased anti-inflammatory Interleukin (IL)-10/IL-6 cytokine ratio in macrophages,
    (xxvi) capable of not inducing pro-inflammatory IL-6, Tumor Necrosis Factor Alpha (TNFα), IL-1β, IL-23 or IL-12 production or gene expression in macrophages,
    (xxvii) capable of downmodulating one or more genes induced in Interferon gamma (IFN-γ) treated colonic organoids,
    (xxix) capable of producing IL-18,
    (xxx) capable of inducing the activation of antigen presenting cells,
    (xxxi) capable of reducing the expression of one or more inhibitory receptors on T cells,
    (xxxii) capable of increasing expression of one or more genes/proteins associated with T cell activation and/or function,
    (xxxiii) capable of enhancing the ability of CD8+ T cells to kill tumor cells,
    (xxxiv) capable of enhancing the efficacy of an immune checkpoint inhibitor therapy,
    (xxxv) capable of reducing colonic inflammation,
    (xxxvi) capable of promoting the recruitment of CD8+ T cells to tumors, and combinations thereof
    (xxxvii) capable of producing antioxidants, and optionally, flavonoids, terpenoids, acorbate and combinations thereof.
  • In certain embodiments, the not activating a toll-like receptor pathway comprises no activation of TLR4 or TLR5, and/or wherein the activating a toll-like receptor pathway comprises activation of TLR2. In certain embodiments, the one or more genes induced in IFN-γ treated colonic organoids, is selected from the group consisting of genes associated with inflammatory chemokine signaling, Nuclear Factor Kappa B (NF-κB) signaling, TNF family signaling, type I interferon signaling, type II interferon signaling, TLR signaling, lymphocyte trafficking, Th17 cell differentiation, Th1 differentiation, Th2 differentiation, apoptosis, inflammasomes, autophagy, oxidative stress, major histocompatibility (MHC) class I and II antigen presentation, complement, mTor, nod-like receptor signaling, Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-Bisphosphate 3-Kinase (PI3K) signaling, and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the one or more inhibitory receptors on T cells is selected from the group consisting of T Cell Immunoreceptor With Ig And ITIM Domains (TIGIT), T-Cell Immunoglobulin Mucin Family Member 3 (TIM-3), Lymphocyte Activating 3 (LAG-3), and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the one or more genes or proteins associated with T cell activation and/or function is selected from the group consisting of CD45RO, CD69, IL-24, TNF-α, perforin, IFN-γ, and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, at least one microbial entity is capable of producing (a) one or more indole-containing compounds, optionally wherein the indole-containing compound is selected from the group consisting of indole, indole acetic acid (IAA), and indole propionic acid (IPA) and/or (b) bacteriocins and/or antibacterial peptides and/or (c) a biosurfactant that reduces pro-inflammatory cytokines. In certain embodiments, at least one microbial entity metabolizes human produced primary bile acids into secondary bile acids, optionally wherein the primary bile acid is cholic acid, chenodeoxycholic acid, or combinations thereof, and optionally wherein the secondary bile acid inhibits FXR and/or activates TGR5. In certain embodiments, at least one microbial entity produces more omega-3 fatty acids compared to omega-6 fatty acids. In certain embodiments, at least one microbial entity comprises one or more bacteria that are capable of producing a metabolite selected from Tables 5 or 7. In certain embodiments, the composition further comprises a metabolite selected from Tables 5 or 7. In certain embodiments, the composition further comprises a prebiotic fiber. In certain embodiments, the inhibition of inflammation in the subject is caused by the production at least one anti-inflammatory metabolite by at least one microbial entity. In certain embodiments, the method reduces the level and/or activity of at least one inflammatory cytokine from Table 8 relative to a level and/or activity of the inflammatory cytokine in the serum of the human subject; or a tissue of the subject, prior to administering the pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or food stuff. In certain embodiments, method comprises treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an immune system disorder. In certain embodiments, the immune system disorder is selected from the group consisting of allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, allergic bronchial asthma, atopic eczema, anaphylaxis, insect sting, drug allergy, food allergy, asthma, eczema, a disorder or condition associated with a pathological Th17 activity, and a rheumatic disease selected from spondyloarthritis, psoriasis and rheumatoid arthritis.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEVERAL VIEWS OF THE DRAWINGS
  • These and other features, aspects, and advantages of the present invention will become better understood with regard to the following description, and accompanying drawings, where:
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways involving Gamma aminobutyric acid (GABA).
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of succinate, acrylate and propanediol.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of Butyrate.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of phenylalanine, tyrosine and tryptophan biosynthesis.
  • FIG. 5A is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the deconjugation of Tauro-Cholic Acid (CA)/Glyco-CA and subsequent conversion to 12-dehydro-CA, UCA, and Iso-CA.
  • FIG. 5B is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the deconjugation of Tauro-Chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA)/Glyco-CDCA and subsequent conversion to Ursodeoxycholic acid (UDCA).
  • FIG. 5C is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the conversion of CA to Deoxycholic acid (DCA) via the bai pathway.
  • FIG. 5D is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the conversion of CDCA to Lithocholic acid (LCA) via the bai pathway.
  • FIG. 5E is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of secondary acids, specifically the conversion of UDCA to Lithocholic acid (LCA) via the bai pathway.
  • FIG. 6 is a table listing the enzymes involved in the biosynthesis of EPS.
  • FIG. 7 is a table listing the essential genes in the Lactobacillus EPS gene clusters and families.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of tryptophan and indole 3 acetic acid.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram of the metabolic pathways of tryptophan and indole 3 acetic acid.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram of the genes and proteins that comprise the flagellum.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram of the genes and chemical structure of Surfactin A.
  • FIG. 12 (top) is a diagram of the organization and positions of the homologous gene clusters in B. subtilis RB14. The iturin operon was reported to be more than 38 kb long and composed of four open reading frames, ituD, ituA, ituB, and ituC. A diagram of the chemical structure of Iturin surfactant is also shown (bottom).
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram of the chemical structure of fengycin surfactant. This peptide is synthesized nonribosomally by five fengycin synthetases, which interlock in the order of FenC-FenD-FenE-FenA-FenB to form a complex.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram of the cellular regulation of Nisin surfactant.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram of the biosynthetic pathways of omega-3 pulynsaturated fatty acids, PUFA and PUHC. Domain designations within the Pfa synthase are; phosphopantetheinyl transferase (PPT), β-ketoacyl synthase (KS), malonyl-CoA:ACP transacylase (MAT), acyl-carrier protein (ACP), ketoacyl reductase (KR), dehydratase/isomerase (DH), acyltransferase (AT), chain-length factor (CLF), and enoyl reductase (ER). The Pfa synthase multienzyme complex.
  • FIG. 16 are diagrams of biosynthetic pathways of type II fatty acids.
  • FIG. 17A is a graph depicting butyrate production of the indicated strains and DMAs.
  • FIG. 17B is a graph depicting propionate production of the indicated strains and DMAs.
  • FIG. 18 is a graph depicting TNFα secretion of co-cultures of the indicated strains and DMAs with macrophage-like cells.
  • FIG. 19 is a graph depicting IL-8 secretion of co-cultures of the indicated strains and DMAs with intestinal epithelial cells.
  • FIG. 20 is a graph depicting IL-8 secretion of co-cultures of the indicated strains and DMAs with intestinal epithelial cells.
  • FIG. 21 is a graph depicting GABA production of the indicated strains and DMAs. Vertical lines separate each indicated DMA and strains that comprise each DMA are shown individually adjacent to the indicated DMA.
  • FIG. 22 is a graph depicting Serotonin production of the indicated strains and DMAs. Vertical lines separate each indicated DMA and strains that comprise each DMA are shown individually adjacent to the indicated DMA.
  • FIG. 23 is a graph depicting the concentration of serotonin produced in vitro by the indictated cultured DMAs.
  • FIG. 24 is a graph depicting the concentration of serotonin produced in vitro by the indictated cultured individual strains of the DMAs, the sum of the serotonin produced of the individual stains (“sum”) and the concentration of serotonin produced in vitro by the indicated cultured DMAs.
  • FIG. 25 are graphs depicting the concentration of metabolites: acetate (top left), butyrate (top right), propionate (bottom left) and GABA (bottom right), measured in the culture medium of the indicated DMAs cultured in vitro. “ND” indicates not detected.
  • FIG. 26 are graphs depicting concentration of cytokines IL-1β, IL-6, IL-10 and TNFα in culture media of macrophages cultured in vitro with the indicated DMAs, medium alone (RPMI) or lipopolysacharride (LPS) positive control.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram depicting the experimental design for a delayed type hypersensitivity (DTH) mouse model for testing DMAs in vivo. Images of exemplary healthy and unhealthy (inflamed) mouse paws are shown at bottom.
  • FIG. 28 is a graph depicting quantification of paw swelling in mice administered the indicated DMA compositions or vehicle control (water). Y-axis indicates paw swelling, measured by the difference between the injected (DTH) and uninjected (control) paw by calipers (mm)* p<0.05, One-way ANOVA with Dunnett's multiple comparisons test.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram depicting the experimental design for a mouse collagen-induced arthritis (CIA) model of rheumatoid arthritis for testing DMAs effects on disease progression and immune system activity. Exemplary images of healthy and arthritic paws are shown (bottom).
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION Definitions
  • Terms used in the claims and specification are defined as set forth below unless otherwise specified.
  • As used herein, the term “derived from” includes microbes immediately taken from an environmental sample as well as microbes isolated from an environmental source and subsequently grown in pure culture. The term “derived from” also includes material isolated from the recited source, and materials obtained using the isolated materials (e.g., cultures of microorganisms made from microorganisms isolated from the recited source).
  • As used herein, the term “preventing” includes completely or substantially reducing the likelihood or occurrence or the severity of initial clinical or aesthetical symptoms of a condition.
  • As used herein, the term “about” includes variation of up to approximately +/−10% and that allows for functional equivalence in the product.
  • As used herein, the term “colony-forming unit” or “cfu” is an individual cell that is able to clone itself into an entire colony of identical cells.
  • As used herein all percentages are weight percent unless otherwise indicated.
  • As used herein, “viable organisms” are organisms that are capable of growth and multiplication. In some embodiments, viability can be assessed by numbers of colony-forming units that can be cultured. In some embodiments viability can be assessed by other means, such as quantitative polymerase chain reaction.
  • “Microbiome” refers to the genetic content of the communities of microbes that live inside and on the human body, or inside or outside a plant, both sustainably and transiently, including eukaryotes, archaea, bacteria, and viruses (including bacterial viruses (i.e., phage)), wherein “genetic content” includes genomic DNA, RNA such as ribosomal RNA, the epigenome, plasmids, and all other types of genetic information.
  • The term “microbial entity” as used herein, refers to the community of microorganisms that occur (sustainably or transiently) in and on a plant or an animal subject, typically a mammal such as a human, including eukaryotes, archaea, bacteria, and viruses (including bacterial viruses i.e., phage).
  • The term “metabolic signature” as used herein, refers to the ability of an organism to produce or utilize one or more metabolites.
  • The term “functional expression sequence” as used herein, refers to any polynucleotide (RNA or DNA) or amino acid sequence resulting in a functional polynucleotide (e.g., mRNA, tRNA rRNA) or protein, including fragments of protein that form functional binding domains or domains with a discrete activity (e.g., enzymatic activity) within the cell.
  • A “combination” of two or more bacteria includes the physical co-existence of the two bacteria, either in the same material or product or in physically connected products, as well as the temporal co-administration or co-localization of the two bacteria.
  • As used herein “heterologous” designates organisms to be administered that are not naturally present in the same proportions as in the therapeutic composition as in subjects to be treated with the therapeutic composition. These can be organisms that are not normally present in individuals in need of the composition described herein, or organisms that are not present in sufficient proportion in said individuals. These organisms can comprise a synthetic composition of organisms derived from separate plant sources or can comprise a composition of organisms derived from the same plant source, or a combination thereof.
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle” as used herein, refers to any compound or device that is formulated with the microbial entities into a pharmaceutical composition described herein to improve delivery of the pharmaceutical composition to the subject to which the composition has been administered. Pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicles include excipients, liposomes, nanoparticles, and nanovectors.
  • The term “medical food” as used herein, refers to the FDA designation of a nutritional composition for oral administration that includes a therapeutic or prophylactic substance. Medical foods can be in solid, liquid or gel form.
  • The term “foodstuff” as used herein, refers to a nutritional composition for oral administration that is in solid, liquid or gel form. A medical food can also be a foodstuff.
  • The term “utilizes a metabolite” as used herein, refers to capability of a microbial entity described herein to metabolize a metabolite into a different form, either by catabolism or anabolism.
  • The term “anti-inflammatory product” as used herein, refers to any substance that has an effect (either direct or indirect) on a subject in contact with the product that results in reduction of inflammation, or any detectable markers of inflammation known in the art.
  • The term “pro-inflammatory cytokines” as used herein, refers to small proteins that regulate the activity of blood cells such as immune system cells and are involved in the upregulation of inflammatory reactions. Pro-inflammatory cytokines can be produced by activated macrophages or other immune cells, endothelial cells and epithelial cells.
  • The term “immune health” as used herein, refers to the functions and activity of the immune system and cells associated with the immune system of a healthy subject. As used herein, the term “improving immune health” refers to modulating the activity and/or function of the immune system so as to increase the immune system's ability to detect foreign antigens, pathogens, and/or abonormal cells (such as but not limited to cancer cells and infected cells), and/or refers to modulating the immune system's activity and/or function in a subject exhibiting abnormally increased immune system activity/immune response relative to healthy subjects, such as conditions or diseases related to increased inflammation (such as, but not limited to, Alheimer's disease, cancer, asthma, heart disease, type II diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis) and/or conditions or diseases related to increased immune response (e.g., autoimmune disease).
  • The term “ameliorating” refers to any therapeutically beneficial result in the treatment of a disease state, e.g., an immune system disorder disease state, including prophylaxis, lessening in the severity or progression, remission, or cure thereof.
  • The term “in situ” refers to processes that occur in a living cell growing separate from a living organism, e.g., growing in tissue culture.
  • The term “in vivo” refers to processes that occur in a living organism.
  • The term “mammal” as used herein includes both humans and non-humans and include but is not limited to humans, non-human primates, canines, felines, murines, bovines, equines, and porcines.
  • The term “sufficient amount” means an amount sufficient to produce a desired effect, e.g., an amount sufficient to modulate inflammation.
  • The term “therapeutically effective amount” is an amount that is effective to ameliorate a symptom of a disease.
  • Abbreviations used in this application include the following: rDNA refers to ribosomal DNA, HDAC refers to histone deacetylase, IL-10 refers to Interleukin 10, IL-6 refers to Interleukin 6, TNFα, refers to Tumor Necrosis Factor Alpha, IFN-γ, refers to Interferon Gamma, and TLR refers to Toll Like Receptor.
  • It must be noted that, as used in the specification and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
  • This disclosure has several advantages, such as providing for new pharmaceutical compositions, dietary supplements, medical foods and solid food stuff, comprising new combinations of live microbe populations for the treatment and/or prevention of immune system disorders and conditions related to inflammation, including both pathogen assisted conditions and conditions that are independent of pathogens. Included with the present disclosure are methods for use of the pharmaceutical composition, dietary supplements, medical foods and solid food stuff products, and methods for selecting microbial entities to formulate same.
  • Compounds
  • Nucleic Acids
  • The term percent of “identity,” in the context of two or more nucleic acid or polypeptide sequences, refer to two or more sequences or subsequences that have a specified percentage of nucleotides or amino acid residues that are the same, when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence, as measured using one of the sequence comparison algorithms described below (e.g., BLASTP and BLASTN or other algorithms available to persons of skill) or by visual inspection. Depending on the application, the percent of “identity” can exist over a region of the sequence being compared, e.g., over a functional domain, or, alternatively, exist over the full length of the two sequences to be compared.
  • For sequence comparison, typically one sequence acts as a reference sequence to which test sequences are compared. When using a sequence comparison algorithm, test and reference sequences are input into a computer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, and sequence algorithm program parameters are designated. The sequence comparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identity for the test sequence(s) relative to the reference sequence, based on the designated program parameters.
  • Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith & Waterman, Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482 (1981), by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman & Wunsch, J. Mol. Biol. 48:443 (1970), by the search for similarity method of Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (1988), by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Dr., Madison, Wis.), or by visual inspection (see generally Ausubel et al., infra).
  • One example of an algorithm that is suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity is the BLAST algorithm, which is described in Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410 (1990). Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information (www.ncbi.nlm nih.gov/).
    • Compositions
  • Microbial Entities
  • Described herein are compositions such as pharmaceutical compositions, medical foods and solid food stuff comprising a combination of two or more microbial entities.
  • Bacterial Entities
  • Described herein are compositions comprising bacterial entities comprising bacterial species. In certain embodiments, the bacterial entity comprises bacterial species comprising: a 16S rDNA gene sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-83 selected from Table 4. In certain embodiments, the bacterial entity comprises a bacterial species comprising: an 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or at least 99% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-83.
  • In certain embodiments, the bacterial entity comprises bacterial species comprising: a first genome; wherein the first genome comprises at least one functional expression sequence at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6. In certain embodiments, the first genome comprises at least one functional expression sequence at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6. The functional expression sequence can be a gene coding for a protein, an RNA (e.g., an rRNA, an mRNA), or a fragment of a protein (e.g., a binding domain, or an activation domain, or catalytic domain), or a fragment of a nucleic acid (e.g., a fragment of an mRNA coding for a protein domain).
  • In certain embodiments, disclosed herein are compositions for proving immune health comprising viable microbes, comprising:
      • (v) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus brevis;
      • (vi) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial population comprising Lactococcus lactis;
      • (vii) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial population comprising Bacillus velenzensis; and.
      • (viii) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus harbinensis.
  • In certain aspects, disclosed herein are compositions for improving immune health, comprising:
      • (i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 43;
      • (ii) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 285;
      • (iii) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 284; and
      • (iv) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 286.
  • In certain embodiments, the bacterial entity comprises bacterial species comprising: a bacterial species capable of producing an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6 or an enzyme capable of acting on the same substrate as an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6. In certain embodiments, the bacterial species is capable of producing an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99%, identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6. In certain embodiments, the bacterial species is capable of producing an enzyme capable of acting on the same substrate as an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99%, identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6.
  • In certain embodiments, the bacterial species comprises one or more features selected from the group consisting of: (i) capable of engrafting when administered to a subject, (ii) capable of having anti-inflammatory activity, (iii) not capable of inducing pro-inflammatory activity, (iv) capable of producing a secondary bile acid, (v) capable of producing a tryptophan metabolite, (vi) capable of restoring epithelial integrity as determined by a primary epithelial cell monolayer barrier integrity assay, (vii) capable of being associated with remission of an inflammatory bowel disease, (viii) capable of producing a short-chain fatty acid, (ix) capable of inhibiting a HDAC activity, (x) capable of producing a medium-chain fatty acid, (xi) capable of expressing catalase activity, (xii) capable of having alpha-fucosidase activity, (xiii) capable of inducing Wnt activation, (xiv) capable of producing a B vitamin, (xv) capable of modulating host metabolism of endocannabinoid, (xvi) capable of producing a polyamine and/or modulating a host metabolism of a polyamine, (xvii) capable of reducing fecal levels of a sphingolipid, (xviii) capable of modulating host production of kynurenine, (xix) capable of reducing fecal calprotectin level, (xx) not capable of activating a toll-like receptor pathway, (xxi) capable of activating a toll-like receptor pathway, (xxii) not capable of producing ursodeoxycholic acid, (xxiii) capable of not being associated with clinical non-remission of an inflammatory bowel disease, (xxiv) capable of inhibiting apoptosis of intestinal epithelial cells, (xxv) capable of inducing an increased anti-inflammatory IL-10/IL-6 cytokine ratio in macrophages, (xxvi) capable of not inducing pro-inflammatory IL-6, TNFα, IL-1b, IL-23 or IL-12 production or gene expression in macrophages, (xxvii) capable of downmodulating one or more genes induced in IFN-γ treated colonic organoids, (xxix) capable of producing IL-18, (xxx) capable of inducing the activation of antigen presenting cells, (xxxi) capable of reducing the expression of one or more inhibitory receptors on T cells, (xxxii) capable of increasing expression of one or more genes/proteins associated with T cell activation and/or function, (xxxiii) capable of enhancing the ability of CD8+ T cells to kill tumor cells, (xxxiv) capable of enhancing the efficacy of an immune checkpoint inhibitor therapy, (xxxv) capable of reducing colonic inflammation, (xxxvi) capable of promoting the recruitment of CD8+ T cells to tumors, and (xxxvii) combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the not activating a toll-like receptor pathway comprises no activation of TLR4 or TLR5. In certain embodiments, the activating a toll-like receptor pathway comprises activation of TLR2.
  • In certain embodiments, the one or more genes induced in IFN-γ treated colonic organoids, is selected from genes associated with inflammatory chemokine signaling, NF-κB signaling, TNF family signaling, type I interferon signaling, type II interferon signaling, TLR signaling, lymphocyte trafficking, Th17 cell differentiation, Th1 differentiation, Th2 differentiation, apoptosis, inflammasomes, autophagy, oxidative stress, MHC class I and II antigen presentation, complement, mTor, nod-like receptor signaling, PI3K signaling, and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the one or more inhibitory receptors on T cells is selected from TIGIT, TIM-3, LAG-3, and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the one or more genes or proteins associated with T cell activation and/or function is selected from CD45RO, CD69, IL-24, TNF-α, perforin, IFN-γ, and combinations thereof.
  • In certain embodiments, the first bacterial species is capable of producing indole-containing compounds. In certain embodiments, the indole containing compound is selected from indole, indole acetic acid (IAA), and indole propionic acid (IPA). In certain embodiments, the bacterial species is capable of producing bacteriocins and antibacterial peptides. In certain embodiments, the bacterial species is capable of producing neurotransmitters selected from serotonin, gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), dopamine, and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the bacterial species is capable of producing IFNγ, IL-12, TNF-α, IL-17, IL-6, or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, first bacterial species is capable of producing a biosurfactant that reduces pro-inflammatory cytokines such as IL-1β, iNOS, and/or TNF-α. In certain embodiments, bacterial species metabolizes human produced primary bile acids into secondary bile acids. In certain embodiments, the primary bile acid is cholic acid, chenodeoxycholic acid, or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the secondary bile acid inhibits FXR and/or activates TGR5. In certain embodiments, the bacterial species produce more omega-3 fatty acids compared to omega-6 fatty acids. In certain embodiments, bacterial species comprises one or more bacteria that are capable of producing a metabolite selected from Tables 5 or 7.
  • Fungal Entities
  • Described herein are compositions comprising fungal entities comprising fungal species. In certain embodiments, the composition described herein comprises at least one fungal species comprising an 18S rDNA or ITS (Internal Transcribed Spacer) sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 18S rDNA or ITS sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO 1-83 selected from Table 4. In certain embodiments, the composition described herein comprise at least one fungal species comprising an 18S rDNA or ITS sequence that is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or at least 99% identical to a 18S rDNA or ITS sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-83 selected from Table 4.
  • In certain embodiments, the composition described herein comprise at least one fungal species comprising a genome comprising a functional expression sequence selected from at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6. In certain embodiments, at least one fungal species comprising a genome comprising a functional expression sequence selected from at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6.
  • In certain embodiments, the composition described herein comprise at least one fungal species capable of producing a metabolite, or has a functionality selected from Tables 5 or 7.
  • Compositions Comprising Bacterial and Fungal Entities
  • Disclosed herein are compositions (e.g., pharmaceutical compositions, medical foods or solid food stuff) comprising at least one bacterial entity and at least one fungal entity. In certain embodiments, the composition comprises: composition comprising a population of viable microbes, comprising: (i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising: (a) an 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1-83; (b) a first genome; wherein the first genome comprises at least one functional expression sequence at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6; or (c) a bacterial species capable of producing an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 80% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6 or an enzyme capable of acting on the same substrate as an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 80% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6; (ii) a second microbial entity comprising a first fungal species comprising: (a) an 18S rDNA or ITS sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 18S rDNA or ITS sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO selected from Table 4; (b) a genome comprising a functional expression sequence selected from at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6; or (c) a metabolic signature or functionality selected from Tables 5 or 7.
  • In certain embodiments, the compositions described herein comprise at least one additional microbial entity. In certain embodiments, the compositions described herein comprise 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more microbial entities.
  • In certain embodiments, the composition is formulated in an oral dosage form comprising between 1×106 and 1×1012 cfu/dose of each of the bacterial entity and the fungal entity. In certain embodiments, the composition comprises at least 1×106, at least 1×107, at least 1×108, at least 1×109, at least 1×1010, at least 1×1011 cfu/dose of the bacterial entity. In certain embodiments, the composition comprises at least 1×106, at least 1×107, at least 1×108, at least 1×109, at least 1×1010, at least 1×1011 cfu/dose of the fungal entity.
  • In certain embodiments the bacterial entity and the fungal entity synergize to produce an anti-inflammatory effect in a mammalian host. In certain embodiments, the anti-inflammatory effect in a mammalian host is caused by the production at least one anti-inflammatory metabolite by either the bacterial entity, the fungal entity or both the bacterial and fungal entities.
  • In certain embodiments, administering an effective dose of the composition to a human subject reduces the level and/or activity of at least one inflammatory cytokine from Table 8 relative to a level and/or activity of the inflammatory cytokine in the serum of the human subject; or a tissue of the subject, prior to administering the pharmaceutical composition to the subject.
  • In certain embodiments, administering an effective dose of the pharmaceutical composition to a human subject treats, prevents, or reduces the severity of at least one symptom in the subject of an immune system disorder. In certain embodiments, the immune system disorder is selected from allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, allergic bronchial asthma, atopic eczema, anaphylaxis, insect sting, drug allergy, food allergy, asthma, eczema, a disorder or condition associated with a pathological Th17 activity, or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the human subject has an altered Th17 activity,
  • In certain embodiments, administering an effective dose of the pharmaceutical composition to a human subject treats, prevents, or reduces the severity of at least one symptom in the subject of a rheumatic disease selected from rheumatoid arthritis, spondyloarthritis, and psoriasis. In certain embodiments, administering an effective dose of the pharmaceutical composition to a human subject treats, prevents, or reduces the severity of at least one symptom in the subject of periodontal disease. In certain embodiments administering an effective dose of the pharmaceutical composition to a human subject treats, prevents, or reduces the severity of at least one symptom in the subject of gastritis. In certain embodiments the gastritis is H. pylori-associated gastritis.
  • Pharmaceutically Acceptable Delivery Vehicles
  • The microbial entities of the invention can be formulated in pharmaceutical compositions. These compositions can comprise, in addition to one or more of the microbial entities described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle. In certain embodiments the pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle is an excipient.
  • In some embodiments the composition comprises at least one carbohydrate. A “carbohydrate” refers to a sugar or polymer of sugars. The terms “saccharide,” “polysaccharide,” “carbohydrate,” and “oligosaccharide” can be used interchangeably. Most carbohydrates are aldehydes or ketones with many hydroxyl groups, usually one on each carbon atom of the molecule. Carbohydrates generally have the molecular formula CnH2nOn. A carbohydrate can be a monosaccharide, a disaccharide, trisaccharide, oligosaccharide, or polysaccharide. The most basic carbohydrate is a monosaccharide, such as glucose, sucrose, galactose, mannose, ribose, arabinose, xylose, and fructose. Disaccharides are two joined monosaccharides. Exemplary disaccharides include sucrose, maltose, cellobiose, and lactose. Typically, an oligosaccharide includes between three and six monosaccharide units (e.g., raffinose, stachyose), and polysaccharides include six or more monosaccharide units. Exemplary polysaccharides include starch, glycogen, and cellulose. Carbohydrates may contain modified saccharide units such as 2′-deoxyribose wherein a hydroxyl group is removed, 2′-fluororibose wherein a hydroxyl group is replace with a fluorine, or N-acetylglucosamine, a nitrogen-containing form of glucose (e.g., 2′-fluororibose, deoxyribose, and hexose). Carbohydrates may exist in many different forms, for example, conformers, cyclic forms, acyclic forms, stereoisomers, tautomers, anomers, and isomers.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least one lipid. As used herein a “lipid” includes fats, oils, triglycerides, cholesterol, phospholipids, fatty acids in any form including free fatty acids. Fats, oils and fatty acids can be saturated, unsaturated (cis or trans) or partially unsaturated (cis or trans). In some embodiments the lipid comprises at least one fatty acid selected from lauric acid (12:0), myristic acid (14:0), palmitic acid (16:0), palmitoleic acid (16:1), margaric acid (17:0), heptadecenoic acid (17:1), stearic acid (18:0), oleic acid (18:1), linoleic acid (18:2), linolenic acid (18:3), octadecatetraenoic acid (18:4), arachidic acid (20:0), eicosenoic acid (20:1), eicosadienoic acid (20:2), eicosatetraenoic acid (20:4), eicosapentaenoic acid (20:5) (EPA), docosanoic acid (22:0), docosenoic acid (22:1), docosapentaenoic acid (22:5), docosahexaenoic acid (22:6) (DHA), and tetracosanoic acid (24:0). In some embodiments the composition comprises at least one modified lipid, for example a lipid that has been modified by cooking.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least one supplemental mineral or mineral source. Examples of minerals include, without limitation: chloride, sodium, calcium, iron, chromium, copper, iodine, zinc, magnesium, manganese, molybdenum, phosphorus, potassium, and selenium. Suitable forms of any of the foregoing minerals include soluble mineral salts, slightly soluble mineral salts, insoluble mineral salts, chelated minerals, mineral complexes, non-reactive minerals such as carbonyl minerals, and reduced minerals, and combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least one supplemental vitamin. The at least one vitamin can be fat-soluble or water soluble vitamins. Suitable vitamins include but are not limited to vitamin C, vitamin A, vitamin E, vitamin B12, vitamin K, riboflavin, niacin, vitamin D, vitamin B6, folic acid, pyridoxine, thiamine, pantothenic acid, and biotin. Suitable forms of any of the foregoing are salts of the vitamin, derivatives of the vitamin, compounds having the same or similar activity of the vitamin, and metabolites of the vitamin.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least one dietary supplement. Suitable examples are well known in the art and include herbs, botanicals, and certain hormones. Non limiting examples of dietary supplements include ginko, gensing, and melatonin.
  • In some embodiments the composition comprises an excipient. Non-limiting examples of suitable excipients include a tastant, a flavorant, a buffering agent, a preservative, a stabilizer, a binder, a compaction agent, a lubricant, a dispersion enhancer, a disintegration agent, a flavoring agent, a sweetener, a coloring agent.
  • In some embodiments the excipient is a buffering agent. Non-limiting examples of suitable buffering agents include sodium citrate, magnesium carbonate, magnesium bicarbonate, calcium carbonate, and calcium bicarbonate.
  • In some embodiments the excipient comprises a preservative. Non-limiting examples of suitable preservatives include antioxidants, such as alpha-tocopherol and ascorbate, and antimicrobials, such as parabens, chlorobutanol, and phenol.
  • In some embodiments the composition comprises a binder as an excipient. Non-limiting examples of suitable binders include starches, pregelatinized starches, gelatin, polyvinylpyrolidone, cellulose, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose, polyacrylamides, polyvinyloxoazolidone, polyvinylalcohols, C12-C18 fatty acid alcohol, polyethylene glycol, polyols, saccharides, oligosaccharides, and combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises a lubricant as an excipient. Non-limiting examples of suitable lubricants include magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, zinc stearate, hydrogenated vegetable oils, sterotex, polyoxyethylene monostearate, talc, polyethyleneglycol, sodium benzoate, sodium lauryl sulfate, magnesium lauryl sulfate, and light mineral oil.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises a dispersion enhancer as an excipient. Non-limiting examples of suitable dispersants include starch, alginic acid, polyvinylpyrrolidones, guar gum, kaolin, bentonite, purified wood cellulose, sodium starch glycolate, isoamorphous silicate, and microcrystalline cellulose as high HLB emulsifier surfactants.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises a disintegrant as an excipient. In some embodiments the disintegrant is a non-effervescent disintegrant. Non-limiting examples of suitable non-effervescent disintegrants include starches such as corn starch, potato starch, pregelatinized and modified starches thereof, sweeteners, clays, such as bentonite, micro-crystalline cellulose, alginates, sodium starch glycolate, gums such as agar, guar, locust bean, karaya, pecitin, and tragacanth. In some embodiments the disintegrant is an effervescent disintegrant. Non-limiting examples of suitable effervescent disintegrants include sodium bicarbonate in combination with citric acid, and sodium bicarbonate in combination with tartaric acid.
  • In some embodiments, the excipient comprises a flavoring agent. Flavoring agents incorporated into the outer layer can be chosen from synthetic flavor oils and flavoring aromatics; natural oils; extracts from plants, leaves, flowers, and fruits; and combinations thereof. In some embodiments the flavoring agent is selected from cinnamon oils; oil of wintergreen; peppermint oils; clover oil; hay oil; anise oil; eucalyptus; vanilla; citrus oil such as lemon oil, orange oil, grape and grapefruit oil; and fruit essences including apple, peach, pear, strawberry, raspberry, cherry, plum, pineapple, and apricot.
  • In some embodiments, the excipient comprises a sweetener. Non-limiting examples of suitable sweeteners include glucose (corn syrup), dextrose, invert sugar, fructose, and mixtures thereof (when not used as a carrier); saccharin and its various salts such as the sodium salt; dipeptide sweeteners such as aspartame; dihydrochalcone compounds, glycyrrhizin; Stevia rebaudiana (Stevioside); chloro derivatives of sucrose such as sucralose; and sugar alcohols such as sorbitol, mannitol, sylitol, and the like. Also contemplated are hydrogenated starch hydrolysates and the synthetic sweetener 3,6-dihydro-6-methyl-1,2,3-oxathiazin-4-one-2,2-dioxide, particularly the potassium salt (acesulfame-K), and sodium and calcium salts thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises a coloring agent. Non-limiting examples of suitable color agents include food, drug and cosmetic colors (FD&C), drug and cosmetic colors (D&C), and external drug and cosmetic colors (Ext. D&C). The coloring agents can be used as dyes or their corresponding lakes.
  • In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle comprises a liposome.
  • In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle comprises a nanoparticle. In certain embodiments, the nanoparticle is a nanovector. In certain embodiments, the nanovector comprises an amphiphillic polymer. In certain embodiments, the delivery vehicle comprises fruit and/or vegetable powder or extract(s).
  • The weight fraction of the excipient or combination of excipients in the formulation of the pharmaceutical composition is usually about 50% or less, about 45% or less, about 40% or less, about 35% or less, about 30% or less, about 25% or less, about 20% or less, about 15% or less, about 10% or less, about 5% or less, about 2% or less, or about 1% or less of the total weight of the amino acids in the composition.
  • The precise nature of one or more pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicles, excipients, carriers, fillers or other material can depend on whether the composition is a pharmaceutical composition, a medical food, or a solid food stuff and the oral dosage form.
  • Oral Dosage Forms
  • In one aspect provided herein are methods and compositions formulated for oral delivery to a subject in need thereof. In an embodiment, a composition is formulated to deliver a composition comprising combinations of microbial entities disclosed herein to a subject in need thereof. In another embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition is formulated to deliver a composition comprising a combinations of microbial entities to a subject in need thereof. In another embodiment a composition is formulated to deliver a composition comprising prebiotic and a probiotic to a subject in need thereof. Compositions for oral administration can be in tablet, capsule, powder or liquid form.
  • In an embodiment, a composition is administered in solid, semi-solid, micro-emulsion, gel, or liquid form. Examples of such dosage forms include tablet forms disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,048,526, 3,108,046, 4,786,505, 4,919,939, and 4,950,484; gel forms disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,904,479, 6,482,435, 6,572,871, and 5,013,726; capsule forms disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,800,083, 4,532,126, 4,935,243, and 6,258,380; or liquid forms disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,625,494, 4,478,822, and 5,610,184; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • Forms of the compositions that can be used orally include tablets, push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. Tablets can be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients including freeze-dried plant material serving both as prebiotic and as a filler. Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with binders (e.g., povidone, gelatin, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), inert diluents, preservative, antioxidant, disintegrant (e.g., sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose) or lubricating, surface active or dispersing agents. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets can optionally be coated or scored and can be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein. Tablets can optionally be provided with an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut (e.g., colon, lower intestine) other than the stomach. All formulations for oral administration can be in dosages suitable for such administration. The push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with filler such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds (prebiotics or probiotics) can be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols. In addition, stabilizers can be added. Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings. For this purpose, concentrated sugar solutions can be used, which can optionally contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or Dragee coatings for identification or to characterize different combinations of active compound doses.
  • Formulations for oral use can also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water soluble carrier such as polyethylene glycol or an oil medium, for example peanut oil, liquid paraffin, or olive oil.
  • Oral liquid preparations can be in the form of, for example, aqueous or oily suspensions, solutions, emulsions syrups or elixirs, or can be presented as a dry product for reconstitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use. Such liquid preparations can contain conventional additives, such as suspending agents, for example sorbitol, methyl cellulose, glucose syrup, gelatin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, aluminum stearate gel or hydrogenated edible fats, emulsifying agents, for example lecithin, sorbitan monooleate, acacia; nonaqueous vehicles (which can include edible oils), for example almond oil, oily esters such as glycerine, propylene glycol, or ethyl alcohol; preservatives, for example methyl or propyl p-hydoxybenzoate or sorbic acid, and, if desired, conventional flavoring or coloring agents.
  • In an embodiment, a provided composition includes a softgel formulation. A softgel can contain a gelatin-based shell that surrounds a liquid fill. The shell can be made of gelatin, plasticiser (e.g., glycerin and/or sorbitol), modifier, water, color, antioxidant, or flavor. The shell can be made with starch or carrageenan. The outer layer can be enteric coated. In an embodiment, a softgel formulation can include a water or oil soluble fill solution, or suspension of a composition, for example, a prebiotic composition, covered by a layer of gelatin.
  • An enteric coating can control the location of a microbial entity described herien and how it is absorbed in the digestive system. For example, an enteric coating can be designed such that a composition comprising the microbial entity does not dissolve in the stomach but rather travels to the small intestine, where it dissolves. An enteric coating can be stable at low pH (such as in the stomach) and can dissolve at higher pH (for example, in the small intestine). Material that can be used in enteric coatings includes, for example, alginic acid, cellulose acetate phthalate, plastics, waxes, shellac, and fatty acids (e.g., stearic acid, palmitic acid). Enteric coatings are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,225,202, 5,733,575, 6,139,875, 6,420,473, 6,455,052, and 6,569,457, all of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety. The enteric coating can be an aqueous enteric coating. Examples of polymers that can be used in enteric coatings include, for example, shellac (trade name EmCoat 120 N, Marcoat 125); cellulose acetate phthalate (trade name aquacoat CPD®, Sepifilm™ LP, Klucel, Aquacoat® ECD, and Metolose®); polyvinylacetate phthalate (trade name Sureteric®); and methacrylic acid (trade name Eudragit®).
  • In an embodiment, an enteric coated composition comprising a microbial entity is administered to a subject. In another embodiment, an enteric coated composition is administered to a subject. The stomach has an acidic environment that can kill microbial entities. An enteric coating can protect microbial entities as they pass through the stomach and small intestine.
  • Enteric coatings can be used to (1) prevent the gastric juice from reacting with or destroying the active substance, (2) prevent dilution of the active substance before it reaches the intestine, (3) ensure that the active substance is not released until after the preparation has passed the stomach, and (4) prevent live bacteria contained in the preparation from being killed because of the low pH-value in the stomach.
  • Enteric coatings can also be used for avoiding irritation of or damage to the mucous membrane of the stomach caused by substances contained in the oral preparation, and for counteracting or preventing formation or release of substances having an unpleasant odor or taste in the stomach. Finally, such coatings can be used for preventing nausea or vomiting on intake of oral preparations.
  • In an embodiment a composition comprising the microbial entities described herien is provided as a tablet, capsule, or caplet with an enteric coating. In an embodiment the enteric coating is designed to hold the tablet, capsule, or caplet together when in the stomach. The enteric coating is designed to hold together in acid conditions of the stomach and break down in non-acid conditions and therefore release the drug in the intestines.
  • Softgel delivery systems can also incorporate phospholipids or polymers or natural gums to entrap a composition, for example, a prebiotic composition, in the gelatin layer with an outer coating to give desired delayed/control release effects, such as an enteric coating. Formulations of softgel fills can be at pH 2.5-7.5. A softgel formulation can be sealed tightly in an automatic manner A softgel formulation can easily be swallowed, allow for product identification using colors and several shapes, allow uniformity, precision and accuracy between dosages, be safe against adulteration, provide good availability and rapid absorption, and offer protection against contamination, light and oxidation. Furthermore, softgel formulations can avoid unpleasant flavors due to content encapsulation.
  • A composition comprising a softgel formulation can be in any of number of different sizes, including, for example, round, oblong, oval, tube, droplet, or suppositories.
  • In an embodiment a composition is provided in a dosage form which comprises an effective amount of microbial entities and one or more release controlling excipients as described herein. Suitable modified release dosage vehicles include, but are not limited to, hydrophilic or hydrophobic matrix devices, water-soluble separating layer coatings, enteric coatings, osmotic devices, multi-particulate devices, and combinations thereof. In an embodiment the dosage form is a tablet, caplet, capsule or lollipop. In another embodiment, the dosage form is a liquid, oral suspension, oral solution, or oral syrup. In yet another embodiment, the dosage form is a gel capsule, soft gelatin capsule, or hard gelatin capsule.
  • In an embodiment, the dosage form is a gelatin capsule having a size indicated in Table 1.
  • TABLE 1
    Gel Cap Sizes Allowable For Human Consumption
    Empty Gelatin Capsule Physical Specifications
    Outer Height or Actual
    Diameter Locked Volume
    Size (mm) Length (mm) (ml)
    000 9.97 26.14 1.37
    00 8.53 23.30 0.95
    0 7.65 21.7 0.68
    1 6.91 19.4 0.50
    2 6.35 18.0 0.37
    3 5.82 15.9 0.3
    4 5.31 14.3 0.21
    5 4.91 11.1 0.13
    Note:
    sizes and volumes are approximate.
  • In certain embodiments, a composition comprising microbial entities is provided in effervescent dosage forms. The compositions can also comprise non-release controlling excipients.
  • In certain embodiments, a composition comprising a microbial entities is provided in a dosage form that has at least one component that can facilitate release of the prebiotic. In a further embodiment the dosage form can be capable of giving a discontinuous release of the compound in the form of at least two consecutive pulses separated in time from 0.1 up to 24 hours. The compositions can comprise one or more release controlling and non-release controlling excipients, such as those excipients suitable for a disruptable semi-permeable membrane and as swellable substances.
  • In certain embodiments, the compositions described herein comprise a plant or plant extract, either in solid or liquid form.
  • In certain embodiments, a composition comprising microbial entities is provided in an enteric coated dosage form. The composition can also comprise non-release controlling excipients.
  • In certain embodiments, a composition comprising microbial entities is provided in a dosage form for oral administration to a subject in need thereof, which comprises one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or carriers, enclosed in an intermediate reactive layer comprising a gastric juice-resistant polymeric layered material partially neutralized with alkali and having cation exchange capacity and a gastric juice-resistant outer layer.
  • In an embodiment, a composition comprising the microbial entities is provided in the form of enteric-coated granules, for oral administration. The compositions can further comprise cellulose, disodium hydrogen phosphate, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hypromellose, lactose, mannitol, and sodium lauryl sulfate.
  • In certain embodiments, a composition comprising microbial entities is provided in the form of enteric-coated pellets, for oral administration. The compositions can further comprise glyceryl monostearate 40-50, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hypromellose, magnesium stearate, methacrylic acid copolymer type C, polysorbate 80, sugar spheres, talc, and triethyl citrate.
  • In an embodiment, a composition comprising microbial entities is provided in the form of enteric-coated granules, for oral administration. The compositions can further comprise carnauba wax, crospovidone, diacetylated monoglycerides, ethylcellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hypromellose phthalate, magnesium stearate, mannitol, sodium hydroxide, sodium stearyl fumarate, talc, titanium dioxide, and yellow ferric oxide.
  • In certain embodiments, a composition comprising microbial entities can further comprise calcium stearate, crospovidone, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, iron oxide, mannitol, methacrylic acid copolymer, polysorbate 80, povidone, propylene glycol, sodium carbonate, sodium lauryl sulfate, titanium dioxide, and triethyl citrate.
  • The compositions provided herein can be in unit-dosage forms or multiple-dosage forms. Unit-dosage forms, as used herein, refer to physically discrete units suitable for administration to human or non-human animal subject in need thereof and packaged individually. Each unit-dose can contain a predetermined quantity of an active ingredient(s) sufficient to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with other pharmaceutical carriers or excipients. Examples of unit-dosage forms include, but are not limited to, ampoules, syringes, and individually packaged tablets and capsules. Unit-dosage forms can be administered in fractions or multiples thereof. A multiple-dosage form is a plurality of identical unit-dosage forms packaged in a single container, which can be administered in segregated unit-dosage form. Examples of multiple-dosage forms include, but are not limited to, vials, bottles of tablets or capsules, or bottles of pints or gallons. In certain embodiments, the multiple dosage forms comprise different pharmaceutically active agents. For example a multiple dosage form can be provided which comprises a first dosage element comprising a composition comprising a prebiotic and a second dosage element comprising lactose or a probiotic, which can be in a modified release form.
  • In this example a pair of dosage elements can make a single unit dosage. In an embodiment, a kit is provided comprising multiple unit dosages, wherein each unit comprises a first dosage element comprising a composition comprising a prebiotic and a second dosage element comprising probiotic, lactose or both, which can be in a modified release form. In another embodiment the kit further comprises a set of instructions.
  • In an embodiment, compositions can be formulated in various dosage forms for oral administration. The compositions can also be formulated as a modified release dosage form, including immediate-, delayed-, extended-, prolonged-, sustained-, pulsatile-, controlled-, extended, accelerated-, fast-, targeted-, programmed-release, and gastric retention dosage forms. These dosage forms can be prepared according to known methods and techniques (see, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, supra; Modified-Release Drug Delivery Technology, Rathbone et al., Eds., Drugs and the Pharmaceutical Science, Marcel Dekker, Inc.: New York, N.Y., 2002; Vol. 126, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety).
  • In an embodiment, the compositions are in one or more dosage forms. For example, a composition can be administered in a solid or liquid form. Examples of solid dosage forms include but are not limited to discrete units in capsules or tablets, as a powder or granule, or present in a tablet conventionally formed by compression molding. Such compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the three or more agents and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The molded tablets can be optionally coated or scored, having indicia inscribed thereon and can be so formulated as to cause immediate, substantially immediate, slow, controlled or extended release of a composition comprising a prebiotic. Furthermore, dosage forms of the invention can comprise acceptable carriers or salts known in the art, such as those described in the Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, American Pharmaceutical Association (1986), incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • In an embodiment, an effective amount of a composition comprising microbial entities is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition comprising a homogeneous mixture of compounds described herein. When referring to these compositions as “homogeneous,” it is meant that the agents are dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition can be subdivided into unit dosage forms such as tablets, caplets, or capsules. This solid preformulation composition can then be subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above comprising from, for example, 1 g to 20 mg of a prebiotic composition. A composition comprising microbial entities can be formulated, in the case of caplets, capsules or tablets, to be swallowed whole, for example with water.
  • The compositions described herein can be in liquid form. The liquid formulations can comprise, for example, an agent in water-in-solution and/or suspension form; and a vehicle comprising polyethoxylated castor oil, alcohol, and/or a polyoxyethylated sorbitan mono-oleate with or without flavoring. Each dosage form comprises an effective amount of an active agent and can optionally comprise pharmaceutically inert agents, such as conventional excipients, vehicles, fillers, binders, disintegrants, pH adjusting substances, buffer, solvents, solubilizing agents, sweeteners, coloring agents, and any other inactive agents that can be included in pharmaceutical dosage forms for oral administration. Examples of such vehicles and additives can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th edition (1985).
  • The compositions (e.g., pharmaceutical composition, medical food or solid food stuff) described herein can be in a solid, semi-solid, liquid, or gel state at room temperature. The compositions described herein can be formulated for administration as an infant formula, an elderly nutritional formula, a prenatal nutrition formula, an athletic performance formula, a ready-to-use therapeutic food formula, or an athletic recovery formula.
  • Manufacturing
  • The dosage forms described herein can be manufactured using processes that are well known to those of skill in the art. For example, for the manufacture of tablets, an effective amount of a microbial entity described herien can be dispersed uniformly in one or more excipients, for example, using high shear granulation, low shear granulation, fluid bed granulation, or by blending for direct compression. Excipients include diluents, binders, disintegrants, dispersants, lubricants, glidants, stabilizers, surfactants and colorants. Diluents, also termed “fillers,” can be used to increase the bulk of a tablet so that a practical size is provided for compression. Non-limiting examples of diluents include lactose, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, mannitol, dry starch, hydrolyzed starches, powdered sugar, talc, sodium chloride, silicon dioxide, titanium oxide, dicalcium phosphate dihydrate, calcium sulfate, calcium carbonate, alumina and kaolin. Binders can impart cohesive qualities to a tablet formulation and can be used to help a tablet remain intact after compression. Non-limiting examples of suitable binders include starch (including corn starch and pregelatinized starch), gelatin, sugars (e.g., glucose, dextrose, sucrose, lactose and sorbitol), celluloses, polyethylene glycol, waxes, natural and synthetic gums, e.g., acacia, tragacanth, sodium alginate, and synthetic polymers such as polymethacrylates and polyvinylpyrrolidone. Lubricants can also facilitate tablet manufacture; non-limiting examples thereof include magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, stearic acid, glyceryl behenate, and polyethylene glycol. Disintegrants can facilitate tablet disintegration after administration, and non-limiting examples thereof include starches, alginic acid, crosslinked polymers such as, e.g., crosslinked polyvinylpyrrolidone, croscarmellose sodium, potassium or sodium starch glycolate, clays, celluloses, starches, gums and the like. Non-limiting examples of suitable glidants include silicon dioxide, talc, and the like. Stabilizers can inhibit or retard drug decomposition reactions, including oxidative reactions. Surfactants can also include and can be anionic, cationic, amphoteric or nonionic. If desired, the tablets can also comprise nontoxic auxiliary substances such as pH buffering agents, preservatives, e.g., antioxidants, wetting or emulsifying agents, solubilizing agents, coating agents, flavoring agents, and the like.
  • In an embodiment, a softgel formulation is made with a gelatin mass for the outer shell, and a composition including one or more substances, for example microbial entities, for the capsule fill can be prepared. To make the gelatin mass, gelatin powder can be mixed with water and glycerin, heated, and stirred under vacuum. Additives, for example, flavors or colors, can be added to molten gelatin using a turbine mixer and transferred to mobile vessels. The gelatin mass can be kept in a steam-jacketed storage vessel at a constant temperature.
  • The encapsulation process can begin when the molten gel is pumped to a machine and two thin ribbons of gel are formed on either side of machine. These ribbons can then pass over a series of rollers and over a set of die that determine the size and shapes of capsules. A fill composition, for example a prebiotic and/or probiotic fill composition, can be fed to a positive displacement pump, which can dose the fill and inject it between two gelatin ribbons prior to sealing them together through the application of heat and pressure. To remove excess water, the capsules can pass through a conveyer into tumble dryers where a portion of the water can be removed. The capsules can then be placed on, for example, trays, which can be stacked and transferred into drying rooms. In the drying rooms, dry air can be forced over capsules to remove any excess moisture.
  • Release Formulations
  • Immediate-release formulations of an effective amount of a composition comprising microbial entities can comprise one or more combinations of excipients that allow for a rapid release of a pharmaceutically active agent (such as from 1 minute to 1 hour after administration). In an embodiment an excipient can be microcrystalline cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sodium starch glycolate, corn starch, colloidal silica, Sodium Laurel Sulphate, Magnesium Stearate, Prosolve SMCC (HD90), croscarmellose Sodium, Crospovidone NF, Avicel PH200, and combinations of such excipients.
  • “Controlled-release” formulations (also referred to as sustained release (SR), extended-release (ER, XR, or XL), time-release or timed-release, controlled-release (CR), or continuous-release) refer to the release of a prebiotic composition from a dosage form at a particular desired point in time after the dosage form is administered to a subject. Controlled-release formulations can include one or more excipients, including but not limited to microcrystalline cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sodium starch glycolate, corn starch, colloidal silica, Sodium Laurel Sulphate, Magnesium Stearate, Prosolve SMCC (HD90), croscarmellose Sodium, Crospovidone NF, or Avicel PH200. Generally, controlled-release includes sustained but otherwise complete release. A sudden and total release in the large intestine at a desired and appointed time or a release in the intestines such as through the use of an enteric coating are both considered controlled-release. Controlled-release can occur at a predetermined time or in a predetermined place within the digestive tract. It is not meant to include a passive, uncontrolled process as in swallowing a normal tablet. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; 4,008,719; 5,674,533; 5,059,595; 5,591,767; 5,120,548; 5,073,543; 5,639,476; 5,354,556; 5,733,556; 5,871,776; 5,902,632; and 5,837,284 each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • In an embodiment, a controlled release dosage form begins its release and continues that release over an extended period of time. Release can occur beginning almost immediately or can be sustained. Release can be constant, can increase or decrease over time, can be pulsed, can be continuous or intermittent, and the like. Generally, however, the release of at least one pharmaceutically active agent from a controlled-release dosage form will exceed the amount of time of release of the drug taken as a normal, passive release tablet. Thus, for example, while all of at least one pharmaceutically active agent of an uncoated aspirin tablet should be released within, for example, four hours, a controlled-release dosage form could release a smaller amount of aspirin over a period of six hours, 12 hours, or even longer. Controlled-release in accordance with the compositions and methods described herein generally means that the release occurs for a period of six hours or more, such as 12 hours or more.
  • In certain embodiments, a controlled release dosage refers to the release of an agent, from a composition or dosage form in which the agent is released according to a desired profile over an extended period of time. In an embodiment, controlled-release results in dissolution of an agent within 20-720 minutes after entering the stomach. In certain embodiments, controlled-release occurs when there is dissolution of an agent within 20-720 minutes after being swallowed. In certain embodiments, controlled-release occurs when there is dissolution of an agent within 20-720 minutes after entering the intestine. In certain embodiments, controlled-release results in substantially complete dissolution after at least 1 hour following administration. In certain embodiments, controlled-release results in substantially complete dissolution after at least 1 hour following oral administration. For example, controlled-release compositions allow delivery of an agent to a subject in need thereof over an extended period of time according to a predetermined profile. Such release rates can provide therapeutically effective levels of agent for an extended period of time and thereby provide a longer period of pharmacologic or diagnostic response as compared with conventional rapid release dosage forms. Such longer periods of response provide for many inherent benefits that are not achieved with immediate-release dosages. When used in connection with the dissolution profiles discussed herein, the term “controlled-release” refers to wherein all or less than all of the total amount of a dosage form, made according to methods and compositions described herein, delivers an active agent over a period of time greater than 1 hour.
  • In an aspect, controlled-release refers to delayed release of an agent, from a composition or dosage form in which the agent is released according to a desired profile in which the release occurs after a period of time.
  • When present in a controlled-release oral dosage form, the compositions described herein can be administered at a substantially lower daily dosage level than immediate-release forms.
  • In an embodiment, the controlled-release layer is capable of releasing 30 to 40% of the one or more active agents (e.g., e.g., a microbial entity) contained therein in the stomach of a subject in need thereof in 5 to 10 minutes following oral administration. In another embodiment, the controlled-release layer is capable of releasing 90% of the one or more active agents (e.g., a microbial entity) is released in 40 minutes after oral administration.
  • In some embodiments, the controlled-release layer comprises one or more excipients, including but not limited to silicified microcrystalline cellulose (e.g., HD90), croscarmellose sodium (AC-Di-Sol), hydroxyl methyl propyl cellulose, magnesium stearate, or stearic acid. In an embodiment, a controlled release formulation weighs between 100 mg to 3 g.
  • Pharmaceutical carriers or vehicles suitable for administration of the compounds provided herein include all such carriers known to those skilled in the art to be suitable for the particular mode of administration. In addition, the compositions can one or more components that do not impair the desired action, or with components that supplement the desired action, or have another action.
  • In certain embodiments, an effective amount of the microbial entity is formulated in an immediate release form. In this embodiment, the immediate-release form can be included in an amount that is effective to shorten the time to its maximum concentration in the blood. By way of example, certain immediate-release pharmaceutical preparations are taught in United States Patent Publication US 2005/0147710A1 entitled, “Powder Compaction and Enrobing,” which is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference.
  • The dosage forms described herein can also take the form of pharmaceutical particles manufactured by a variety of methods, including but not limited to high-pressure homogenization, wet or dry ball milling, or small particle precipitation (nano spray). Other methods to make a suitable powder formulation are the preparation of a solution of active ingredients and excipients, followed by precipitation, filtration, and pulverization, or followed by removal of the solvent by freeze-drying, followed by pulverization of the powder to the desired particle size.
  • In a further aspect the dosage form can be an effervescent dosage form. Effervescent means that the dosage form, when mixed with liquid, including water and saliva, evolves a gas. Some effervescent agents (or effervescent couple) evolve gas by means of a chemical reaction which takes place upon exposure of the effervescent disintegration agent to water or to saliva in the mouth. This reaction can be the result of the reaction of a soluble acid source and an alkali monocarbonate or carbonate source. The reaction of these two general compounds produces carbon dioxide gas upon contact with water or saliva. An effervescent couple (or the individual acid and base separately) can be coated with a solvent protective or enteric coating to prevent premature reaction. Such a couple can also be mixed with previously lyophilized particles (such as a prebiotic). The acid sources can be any which are safe for human consumption and can generally include food acids, acid and hydrite antacids such as, for example: citric, tartaric, amalic, fumeric, adipic, and succinics. Carbonate sources include dry solid carbonate and bicarbonate salt such as, preferably, sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, potassium bicarbonate and potassium carbonate, magnesium carbonate and the like. Reactants which evolve oxygen or other gasses and which are safe for human consumption are also included. In an embodiment citric acid and sodium bicarbonate are used.
  • In certain aspects, the dosage form can be in a candy form (e.g., matrix), such as a lollipop or lozenge. In an embodiment, an effective amount of a prebiotic is dispersed within a candy matrix. In an embodiment, the candy matrix comprises one or more sugars (such as dextrose or sucrose). In certain embodiments, the candy matrix is a sugar-free matrix. The choice of a particular candy matrix is subject to wide variation. Conventional sweeteners such as sucrose can be utilized, or sugar alcohols suitable for use with diabetic patients, such as sorbitol or mannitol can be employed. Other sweeteners, such as the aspartame, can also be easily incorporated into a composition in accordance with compositions described herein. The candy base can be very soft and fast dissolving, or can be hard and slower dissolving. Various forms will have advantages in different situations.
  • A candy mass composition comprising an effective amount of the microbial entities can be orally administered to a subject in need thereof so that an effective amount of the microbial entities will be released into the subject's mouth as the candy mass dissolves and is swallowed. A subject in need thereof includes a human adult or child.
  • In an embodiment, a candy mass is prepared that comprises one or more layers which can comprise different amounts or rates of dissolution of the microbial entity. In an embodiment a multilayer candy mass (such as a lollipop) comprises an outer layer with a concentration of the microbial entity differing from that of one or more inner layers. Such a drug delivery system has a variety of applications.
  • The choices of matrix and the concentration of the drug in the matrix can be important factors with respect to the rate of drug uptake. A matrix that dissolves quickly can deliver drug into the subject's mouth for absorption more quickly than a matrix that is slow to dissolve. Similarly, a candy matrix that contains the prebiotic in a high concentration can release more of the prebiotic in a given period of time than a candy having a low concentration. In an embodiment a candy matrix such as one disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,671,953 or US Application Publication No. 2004/0213828 (which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety) is used to deliver the prebiotic.
  • The dosage forms described herein can also take the form of pharmaceutical particles manufactured by a variety of methods, including but not limited to high-pressure homogenization, wet or dry ball milling, or small particle precipitation (e.g., nGimat's NanoSpray). Other methods useful to make a suitable powder formulation are the preparation of a solution of active ingredients and excipients, followed by precipitation, filtration, and pulverization, or followed by removal of the solvent by freeze-drying, followed by pulverization of the powder to the desired particle size. In an embodiment the pharmaceutical particles have a final size of 3-1000 μM, such as at most 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1000 μM. In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical particles have a final size of 10-500 μM. In another embodiment the pharmaceutical particles have a final size of 50-600 μM. In another embodiment, the pharmaceutical particles have a final size of 100800 μM.
  • In an embodiment, an oral dosage form (such as a powder, tablet, or capsule) is provided comprising a prebiotic composition comprising 0.7 g of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide, 0.2 g of lactose, 0.01 g of glucose, 0.01 g of galactose, 0.1-0.2 g of a binder, 0.1-0.2 g of a dispersant, 0.1-0.2 g of a solubilizer, wherein the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide are composed of 1-25% disaccharides, 1-25% trisaccharides, 1-25% tetrasaccharides, and 1-25% pentasaccharides. The oral dosage form can be in the form of a powder, capsule, or tablet. Suitable amounts of binders, dispersants, and solubilizers are known in the art for preparation of oral tablets or capsules.
  • In certain embodiments, an oral dosage form (such as a powder, tablet or capsule) is provided comprising microbial entities comprising 1-99.9% by weight of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide 0.5-20% by weight of lactose, 0.1-2% by weight of glucose, 0.1-2% by weight of galactose, 0.05-2% by weight of a binder, 0.05-2% by weight of a dispersant, 0.05-2% by weight of a solubilizer, wherein the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide are composed of 1-25% by weight disaccharides, 1-25% by weight trisaccharides, 1-25% by weight tetrasaccharides, and 1-25% by weight pentasaccharides.
  • In certain embodiments, an oral dosage form (such as a powder, tablet, or capsule) is provided comprising microbial entities comprising 1, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 95, 99.5, 100% by weight of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide 0, 5, 10, 15, or 20% by weight of lactose, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of glucose, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of galactose, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of a binder, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of a dispersant, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, or 2% by weight of a solubilizer, wherein the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide are composed of 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25% by weight disaccharides, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25% by weight trisaccharides, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25% by weight tetrasaccharides, and 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25% by weight pentasaccharides.
  • In certain embodiments, an oral dosage form is provided comprising a composition comprising microbial entities, wherein the oral dosage form is a syrup. The syrup can comprise 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, or 85% solid. The syrup can comprise 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, or 50% liquid, for example, water. The syrup can comprise a composition comprising microbial entities. The syrup can be, for example, 1-96%, 10-96%, 20-96%, 30-96%, 40-96%, 50-96%, 60-96%, 70-96%, 80-96%, or 90-96% microbial entities. The syrup can be, for example, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, or 96% microbial entities. In an embodiment, a composition comprises FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • In an embodiment, the softgel capsule is 0.25 mL, 0.5 mL, 1.0 mL, 1.25 mL, 1.5 mL, 1.75 mL, or 2.0 mL. In another embodiment, a softgel capsule comprises 0.1 g to 2.0 g of prebiotic composition. In another embodiment, a softgel capsule comprises 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, or 2.0 g of a prebiotic composition. In certain embodiments, a softgel capsule comprises FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide and inulin or FOS.
  • In certain embodiments, the composition is delivered in a gelatin capsule containing an amount of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide within the ranges listed in Table 2. In certain embodiments, the number of pills taken per day is within the ranges listed in Table 2.
  • TABLE 2
    Exemplary GOS Dosing Units
    Exemplary GOS Composition
    Dosages in Gel Caps
    GOS/ # pills
    Size Pill (g) per day
    000 1-2 1-15
    00 0.6-1.5 1-25
    0 0.4-1.1 1-38
    1 0.3-0.8 1-50
    2 0.25-0.6  1-60
    3 0.2-0.5 1-75
    4 0.14-0.3  1-837
  • In certain embodiments, a composition is provided that does not contain a preservative. In another embodiment, a composition is provided that does not contain an antioxidant. In another embodiment, a composition is provided that does not contain a preservative or an antioxidant. In an embodiment, a composition comprising FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide does not contain a preservative or an antioxidant.
  • In certain embodiments, a composition is formulated as a viscous fluid. In another embodiment, a composition is formulated such that its water content is low enough that it does not support microbial growth. In an embodiment, this composition is an intermediate-moisture food, with a water activity between 0.6 and 0.85; in another embodiment this composition is a low-moisture food, with a water activity less than 0.6. Low-moisture foods limit microbial growth significantly and can be produced by one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, these products could be produced similarly to a liquid-centered cough drop. In another embodiment, a prebiotic composition is formulated as a viscous fluid without a preservative in a gel capsule. In an embodiment, a composition comprising FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide is a viscous fluid. In an embodiment, a composition comprises a high percentage of FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide that does not support microbial growth. In certain embodiments, the composition comprises FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide and inulin or FOS.
  • In certain embodiments, an oral dosage form is provided comprising a composition comprising microbial entities, wherein the oral dosage form is a softgel. In an embodiment the softgel comprises a syrup. In an embodiment the syrup comprises a composition comprising microbial entities. In an embodiment the composition comprises FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide. In another embodiment the composition comprises more than 80% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide. In an embodiment, the composition comprises between 80-99.9% FOS, GOS, or other. In an embodiment, the composition comprises more than 80% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide. In an embodiment, the composition comprises 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, or 99.9% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide.
  • In an embodiment a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is formulated for delivery in a soft gel capsule. In an embodiment a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition formulated for delivery in a soft gel capsule is a high percentage FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition, such as a 90-100% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition (e.g., 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 or 100% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition by weight). In another embodiment a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition formulated for delivery in a soft gel capsule comprises 95% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide. In another embodiment a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition formulated for delivery in a soft gel capsule comprises 96% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide. In another embodiment, the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is formulated such that its water content is low enough that it does not support microbial growth. In another embodiment, the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is formulated as a viscous fluid without a preservative in a gel capsule. In another embodiment, the FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is formulated as a viscous fluid without an antioxidant in a gel capsule. In another embodiment the soft gel capsule comprises 0.1-2 g of a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition.
  • In certain embodiments, a composition described can be formulated as described, in U.S. Pat. No. 6,750,331, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. A composition can be formulated to comprise an oligosaccharide, a foaming component, a water-insoluble dietary fiber (e.g., cellulose or lignin), or a neutralizing component. In an embodiment, a composition comprises a prebiotic fiber. In an embodiment, a composition can be in the form of a chewable tablet.
  • In an embodiment, a foaming component can be at least one member selected from the group consisting of sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium carbonate, and calcium carbonate. In an embodiment, a neutralizing component can be at least one member selected from the group consisting of citric acid, L-tartaric acid, fumaric acid, L-ascorbic acid, DL-malic acid, acetic acid, lactic acid, and anhydrous citric acid. In an embodiment, a water-insoluble dietary fiber can be at least one member selected from the group consisting of crystalline cellulose, wheat bran, oat bran, cone fiber, soy fiber, and beet fiber. The formulation can contain a sucrose fatty acid ester, powder sugar, fruit juice powder, and/or flavoring material.
  • Formulations of the provided invention can include additive components selected from various known additives. Such additives include, for example, saccharides (excluding oligosaccharides), sugar alcohols, sweeteners and like excipients, binders, disintegrators, lubricants, thickeners, surfactants, electrolytes, flavorings, coloring agents, pH modifiers, fluidity improvers, and the like. Specific examples of the additives include wheat starch, potato starch, corn starch, dextrin and like starches; sucrose, glucose, fructose, maltose, xylose, lactose and like saccharides (excluding oligosaccharides); sorbitol, mannitol, maltitol, xylitol and like sugar alcohols; calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate and like excipients; starch, saccharides, gelatin, gum arabic, dextrin, methyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, hydroxypropylcellulose, xanthan gum, pectin, gum tragacanth, casein, alginic acid and like binders and thickeners; leucine, isoleucine, L-valine, sugar esters, hardened oils, stearic acid, magnesium stearate, talc, macrogols and like lubricants; CMC, CMC-Na, CMC-Ca and like disintegrators; polysorbate, lecithin and like surfactants; aspartame, alitame and like dipeptides; silicon dioxide and like fluidity improvers; and Stevia, saccharin, and like sweeteners. The amounts of these additives can be properly selected based on their relation to other components and properties of the preparation, production method, etc.
  • In an embodiment, a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition is a chewable oral dosage formulation. In an embodiment the chewable formulation can comprises between 1-99.9% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide. In an embodiment, a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 80% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide 5% L-ascorbic acid, 2% anhydrous citric acid, 3% sodium hydrogencarbonate, 3% calcium carbonate, 2% sucrose fatty acid, 3% fruit juice powder, and 2% potassium carbonate.
  • In an embodiment, a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 85% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide, 5% L-ascorbic acid, 3% sodium hydrogencarbonate, 2% sodium carbonate, 2% sucrose fatty acid ester, 2% fruit juice powder, and 1% potassium carbonate.
  • In an embodiment, a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 90% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide, 2% L-ascorbic acid, 1% anhydrous citric acid, 2% sodium hydrogencarbonate, 2% sodium carbonate, 2% sucrose fatty acid ester, and 1% potassium carbonate.
  • In an embodiment, a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 95% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide, 2% L-ascorbic acid, 1% sodium hydrogencarbonate, and 2% fruit juice powder. In another embodiment, a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 95% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide and 5% of L-ascorbic acid, anhydrous citric acid, sodium hydrogencarbonate, calcium carbonate, sucrose fatty acid, fruit juice powder, or potassium carbonate.
  • In an embodiment, a FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide composition comprises 95% FOS, GOS, or other FOS, GOS, or other appropriate polysaccharide and 5% of L-ascorbic acid, anhydrous citric acid, sodium hydrogencarbonate, calcium carbonate, sucrose fatty acid, fruit juice powder, and potassium carbonate.
  • The microbial entities according to the present invention that is to be given to an individual, administration is preferably in a “therapeutically effective amount” that is sufficient to show benefit to the individual. A “prophylactically effective amount” can also be administered, when sufficient to show benefit to the individual. The actual amount administered, and rate and time-course of administration, will depend on the nature and severity of protein aggregation disease being treated. Prescription of treatment, e.g. decisions on dosage etc, is within the responsibility of general practitioners and other medical doctors, and typically takes account of the disorder to be treated, the condition of the individual patient, the site of delivery, the method of administration and other factors known to practitioners. Examples of the techniques and protocols mentioned above can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16th edition, Osol, A. (ed), 1980.
  • Medical Foods
  • An alternate embodiment of the present disclosure is a formulation as a medical food. The consuming public has come to understand that foods possess more than basic nutrition (protein, carbohydrate, fat, etc). For example, 95% of consumers agree that “certain foods have health benefits that go beyond basic nutrition and may reduce the risk of disease or other health concerns.” More than 50% of consumers believe that foods can replace the use of drugs. Replacing the use of drugs may have the benefit of reducing the incidence of adverse side effects suffered by patients following a pharmaceutical drug treatment regimen. In fact, medical foods are assumed to be generally safe, as people have historically consumed these foods safely in non-medical contexts.
  • The compositions of the invention may be administered under the supervision of a medical specialist, or may be self-administered. Medical foods could take the form of nutritional shakes or other liquids or meal replacements. Medical foods of the present invention could also take the form of a powder capable of being consumed upon addition to suitable food or liquid. Medical foods could also take the form of a pill, tablet or capsule.
  • A medical food formulation of the present disclosure could confer benefits of a synthetic composition of microbes isolated from nutritionally beneficial plants, as well as the benefits of prebiotics, or other nutritionally beneficial inclusions, but not consumed to obtain nutrition from them but rather to provide a metabolic function different than a foodstuff. For example, medical foods of the disclosure may also include at least one vitamin, or vitamin precursor. Preferred vitamins possess antioxidant properties and include vitamins A, C and E, and/or their biochemical precursors. Another embodiment of the medical foods of the invention also includes at least one trace element, preferably selected from the group consisting of zinc, manganese and selenium. Medical foods of the disclosure also may include at least one additional antioxidant selected from the group consisting of carotenoids, N-acetylcysteine and L-glutamine. It is known to those of skill in the art how to construct medical foods containing these elements.
  • Medical foods of the present disclosure would include effective doses of microbial entities deemed useful for the indication and effective doses of any vitamin, prebiotic, or other beneficial additive not consumed to obtain nutrition but to add a therapeutic benefit mediated by the production of SCFA or other immuno-stimulant molecules when passing through the GI tract.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprising the microbial entities is a solid foodstuff. Suitable examples of a solid foodstuff include without limitation a food bar, a snack bar, a cookie, a brownie, a muffin, a cracker, a biscuit, a cream or paste, an ice cream bar, a frozen yogurt bar, and the like. In some embodiments, the compositions disclosed herein are incorporated into a therapeutic food. In some embodiments, the therapeutic food is a ready-to-use food that optionally contains some or all essential macronutrients and micronutrients. In some embodiments, the compositions disclosed herein are incorporated into a supplementary food that is designed to be blended into an existing meal. In some embodiments, the supplemental food contains some or all essential macronutrients and micronutrients. In some embodiments, compositions disclosed herein are blended with or added to an existing food to fortify the food's protein nutrition. Examples include food staples (grain, salt, sugar, cooking oil, margarine), beverages (coffee, tea, soda, beer, liquor, sports drinks), snacks, sweets and other foods.
  • Typically, the dietary supplements and medical foods of the present disclosure are consumed at least once daily, and preferably administered two times per day, preferably once in the morning and once in the afternoon. A typical treatment regime for the dietary supplements or medical foods will continue for four to eight weeks. Depending on such factors as the medical condition being treated and the response of the patient, the treatment regime may be extended. A medical food of the present invention will typically be consumed in two servings per day as either a meal replacement or as a snack between meals.
  • Anyone perceived to be at risk of a immune system disorder or other indication described herein can potentially benefit from ingesting the compositions of the disclosure. It is believed to be possible to effectively ameliorate symptoms and conditions associated with immune system disorders and other indications described herein with natural compounds, which do not show any severe side effects. Furthermore, the present methods are expected to be well-tolerated, for example without causing any discomfort or nausea, and simple to apply.
    • Methods of Use
  • Methods for Improving Immune Health
  • In certain aspects, disclosed herein are methods of improving immune health, comprising administering to a subject an effective amount of a composition comprising viable microbes disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, the method of improving immune health comprises administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising viable microbes, comprising:
      • (ix) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus brevis;
      • (x) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial population comprising Lactococcus lactis;
      • (xi) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial population comprising Bacillus velenzensis; and.
      • (xii) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus harbinensis.
  • In certain aspects, disclosed herein are methods of improving immune health, comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising viable microbes, comprising:
      • (xiii) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus brevis;
      • (xiv) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial population comprising Lactococcus lactis;
      • (xv) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial population comprising Bacillus velenzensis; and.
      • (xvi) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus harbinensis.
  • In certain aspects, disclosed herein are methods of improving immune health, comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising:
      • (i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 43;
      • (ii) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 285;
      • (iii) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 284; and
      • (iv) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 286.
  • Methods of Reducing Inflammation
  • In certain aspects, described herein are methods of reducing inflammation in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject and effective amount of a composition comprising viable microbes described herein.
  • In certain embodiments, the method of inhibiting inflammation comprises: administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising:
  • (i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 43
    (ii) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 285;
    (iii) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 284; and
    (iv) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:
  • In certain embodiments, the method results in higher circulating levels of at least one anti-inflammatory marker and/or lower circulating levels of at least one inflammation-associated marker in the human subject. In certain embodiments, the human subject has lower circulating levels of at least one anti-inflammatory marker and/or higher circulating levels of at least one inflammation-associated marker prior to administration of the composition.
  • Immune System Disorders
  • In certain embodiments, described herein are methods of treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an immune system disorder, comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or food stuff) described herein.
  • In certain embodiments, the immune system disorder is the immune system disorder is selected from the group consisting of allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, allergic bronchial asthma, atopic eczema, anaphylaxis, insect sting, drug allergy, food allergy, asthma, eczema, a disorder or condition associated with a pathological Th17 activity, and combinations thereof.
  • Reduction of Inflammatory Cytokines
  • In certain embodiments, described herein are methods of reducing the level and/or activity of at least one inflammatory cytokine comprising administering an effective dose to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein. In certain embodiments, described herein are methods of reducing the level and/or activity of at least one inflammatory cytokine associated with aging comprising administering an effective dose to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein. In certain embodiments, described herein are methods of treating or preventing inflammation or a condition associated with inflammation comprising administering an effective dose to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein. In certain embodiments, the inflammatory cytokine is one from Table 8 In certain embodiments, the inflammatory cytokine is reduced in the serum or select tissue of the human subject after administration of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or food stuff) compared to a level and/or activity of the at least one inflammatory cytokine from Table 8 prior to administration of the composition (e.g., pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or food stuff).
  • Rheumatic Disease
  • In certain embodiments, described herein are methods of treating or preventing at least one symptom of a rheumatic disease comprising administering an effective dose to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein. In certain embodiments, the rheumatic disease is rheumatoid arthritis, spondyloarthritis, or psoriasis. In certain embodiments, the rheumatic disease is rheumatoid arthritis. In certain embodiments, the symptom of rheumatic disease is selected from synovial hyperplasia, articular cartilage damage, damage to the metaphyseal bone, or combinations thereof.
  • Periodontal Disease
  • In certain embodiments, described herein are methods of treating or preventing periodontal disease comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition described herein. In certain embodiments, the compositions described herein can be administered by local administration in the form of a gel, mouthwash, lozenge, paste, medical food or food stuff for the treatment or prevention of periodontal disease.
  • Gastritis
  • In certain embodiments, described herein are methods of treating or preventing gastritis comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein. In certain embodiments, the gastritis is H. pylori-associated gastritis.
  • Osteoarthritis
  • In some embodiments, compositions and methods disclosed herein can be used to treat or prevent osteoarthritis. In certain embodiments, described herein are methods of treating or preventing osteoarthritis comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) described herein.
  • As used herein, the term “osteoarthritis” (abbreviated as “OA”), refers to the disease also known as osteoarthrosis and degenerative joint disease, characterized by inflammation and damage to, or loss of cartilage in any joint or joints, and joint pain. Clinical standards for diagnosing osteoarthritis in subjects including mammalian subjects such as canines and humans are well known and include for example swelling or enlargement of joints, joint tenderness or pain, decreased range of motion in joints, visible joint deformities such as bony growths, and crepitus. Symptoms can be identified by clinical observation and history, or imaging including MRI and X-ray. Criteria for diagnosing the presence or absence of OA and severity or degree of OA include but are not limited to the ACR Criteria for knee OA (R. Altman et al., Development of criteria for the classification and reporting of osteoarthritis: Classification of osteoarthritis of the knee: Diagnostic and Therapeutic Criteria Committee of the American Rheumatism Association. Arthritis Rheum. August 29(8):1039-1049(1986)), functional status criteria according to WOMAC (N. Bellamy et al., 1988, Validation study of WOMAC: a health status instrument for measuring clinically important patient relevant outcomes to antirheumatic drug therapy in patients with osteoarthritis of the hip or knee. J Rheumatol 15:1833-1840), and radiological standards for evaluating OA disease severity according to the Kellgren and Lawrence method for knee OA (Kellgren, J. H. and J. S. Lawrence, Radiological assessment of osteo-arthrosis. Ann Rheum Dis 16:494-502).
  • In some embodiments, the condition to be treated is osteoarthritis. In some embodiments, the condition to be treated is osteoarthritis, and treating the condition further involves administration of any one or combination of known anti-osteoarthritis medications or treatments. These include, but are not limited to, surgery, analgesics, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (aspirin, celecoxib, diclofenac, diflunisal, etodolac, ibuprofen, indomethacin, ketoprofen, ketorolac, nabumetone, naproxen, oxaprozin, piroxicam), menthol, weight loss regimens, physical exercise, acupuncture, narcotics (Codeine, Fentanyl, Hydrocodone, hydroporphone, meperidine, methadone, oxycodone), and physical therapy.
  • Combination Therapy
  • A composition can be administered alone or in combination with other treatments, either simultaneously or sequentially dependent upon the condition to be treated. In some embodiments, the compositions of the present disclosure can be used in conjunction with traditional treatments for an immune system disorder or a condition associated with inflammation. In certain embodiments, the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for reduction of an inflammatory cytokine. In certain embodiments, the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for rheumatoid arthritis. In certain embodiments, the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for periodontal disease. In certain embodiments, the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for gastritis. In certain embodiments, the composition of the present disclosure are used in conjunction with traditional treatments for pathogen associated gastritis (e.g., H. pylori-induced gastritis).
  • Methods of Selecting Microbial Entities
  • In certain embodiments, described herein are methods for selecting a microbial entity for a pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or solid foodstuff for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an immune system disorder comprising a viable microbial population, the method comprising: (i) providing a library of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of microbial candidates of different species; and (ii) generating a gene-of-interest database for orthologous genes-of-interest from the different species, wherein the gene-of-interest is selected from genes involved in the metabolism or biogenesis of short chain fatty acid (propionate and butyrate), indole (indole-3-acetic acid and indole propionic acid), Gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), surfactants (surfactin, nisin, fengycin, and iturin), dopamine, secondary bile acids, exopolysaccharide proteins (EPS), omega 3 fatty acids, and combinations thereof.
  • Methods of Formulating Microbial Entities for Therapeutics
  • In certain aspects, described herein are methods of formulating a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) comprising a viable microbial population for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an immune system disorder, the method comprising: (i) identifying immunomodulatory functions of interest; and (ii) screeing in silico for genes-of-interest to identify microbes with the capacity to produce identified functions of interest using libraries of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of the microbial candidates of different species; and (iii) selecting at least two microbial entity candidates of different species with immunomodulatory function; and (iv) culturing the at least two microbial entities in vitro and detecting formation or activity of an anti-inflammatory product/function in each; and (v) culturing the at least two microbial entities in combination in vitro, collecting supernatatants from the cultures, and treating activated immune cells in vitro with the supernatants and detecting reduction in inflammatory cytokine production.
  • In certain aspects, described herein are methods of formulating a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, medical food or food stuff) comprising a viable microbial population for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of a rheumatic disease, the method comprising: (i) identifying immunomodulatory functions of interest; and (ii) screeing in silico for genes-of-interest to identify microbes with the capacity to produce identified functions of interest using libraries of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of the microbial candidates of different species; and (iii) selecting at least two microbial entity candidates of different species with immunomodulatory function; and (iv) culturing the at least two microbial entities in vitro and detecting formation or activity of an anti-inflammatory product/function in each; and (v) culturing the at least two microbial entities in combination in vitro, collecting supernatatants from the cultures, and treating activated immune cells in vitro with the supernatants and detecting reduction in inflammatory cytokine production.
  • In certain aspects, described herein are methods of formulating a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, dietary supplement or nutritional food stuff) comprising a viable microbial population for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an periodontal disease, the method comprising: (i) identifying immunomodulatory functions of interest; and (ii) screeing in silico for genes-of-interest to identify microbes with the capacity to produce identified functions of interest using libraries of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of the microbial candidates of different species; and (iii) selecting at least two microbial entity candidates of different species with immunomodulatory function; and (iv) culturing the at least two microbial entities in vitro and detecting formation or activity of an anti-inflammatory product/function in each; and (v) culturing the at least two microbial entities in combination in vitro, collecting supernatatants from the cultures, and treating activated immune cells in vitro with the supernatants and detecting reduction in inflammatory cytokine production.
  • In certain aspects, described herein are methods of formulating a composition (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, dietary supplement or nutritional food stuff) comprising a viable microbial population for treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of gastritis, the method comprising: (i) identifying immunomodulatory functions of interest; and (ii) screeing in silico for genes-of-interest to identify microbes with the capacity to produce identified functions of interest using libraries of whole-genome or cDNA transcriptome sequences of the microbial candidates of different species; and (iii) selecting at least two microbial entity candidates of different species with immunomodulatory function; and (iv) culturing the at least two microbial entities in vitro and detecting formation or activity of an anti-inflammatory product/function in each; and (v) culturing the at least two microbial entities in combination in vitro, collecting supernatatants from the cultures, and treating activated immune cells in vitro with the supernatants and detecting reduction in inflammatory cytokine production. In certain embodiments, the gastritis is H. pylori-associated gastritis.
    • EXAMPLES
  • Below are examples of specific embodiments for carrying out the present invention. The examples are offered for illustrative purposes only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention in any way. Efforts have been made to ensure accuracy with respect to numbers used (e.g., amounts, temperatures, etc.), but some experimental error and deviation should, of course, be allowed for.
  • The practice of the present invention will employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventional methods of protein chemistry, biochemistry, recombinant DNA techniques and pharmacology, within the skill of the art. Such techniques are explained fully in the literature. See, e.g., T. E. Creighton, Proteins: Structures and Molecular Properties (W.H. Freeman and Company, 1993); A. L. Lehninger, Biochemistry (Worth Publishers, Inc., current addition); Sambrook, et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (2nd Edition, 1989); Methods In Enzymology (S. Colowick and N. Kaplan eds., Academic Press, Inc.); Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Edition (Easton, Pa.: Mack Publishing Company, 1990); Carey and Sundberg Advanced Organic Chemistry 3rd Ed. (Plenum Press) Vols A and B (1992).
    • Example 1: Microbe Isolation, Bacteria and Fungi
  • Plant-based and fermented foods are rich sources of diverse microbes. A microbial library was developed that contains microbes from these sources as they represent an untapped potential source of novel beneficial microbes. Vegetables typically eaten raw and fermented foods were selected for isolation of microbes of interest. The materials were sourced at the point of distribution in supermarkets selling both conventional and organic farmed vegetables, either washed and ready to eat or without washing. The samples were divided into 50 g portions, thoroughly rinsed with tap water and blended for 30 seconds on
  • use of a coarse and then a fine sieve followed by filtration through a 40 μm sieve. The sieved samples from each food source were stored with a cryoprotectant, for example 10% DMSO, as Solarea Bio plants (SBPs).
  • For DNA extraction, the cell suspension containing the plant microbiota, chloroplasts and plant cell debris was centrifuged at slow speed for removing plant material and the resulting supernatant was centrifuged at high speed to pellet microbial cells. The pellet resuspended in a buffer containing a proprietary plant cell lysis buffer consisting of chelating agents such as EDTA or Versetene EDTA-based chelating agents to remove divalent ions and a suitable non-ionic detergent such as Tween-20, Tween 80, Triton X, and washed then with PBS. DNA was extracted using the MagaZorb DNA extraction kit (Promega). DNA quality and concentration were measured using Nanodrop and Picogreen fluorescent quantification. DNA libraries were built using the Nextera XT library preparation kit (Illumina) and DNA sequencing was performed using an Illumina HiSeqX instrument using a 2×150 bp flow cell. Raw paired-end reads were processed for quality control with Solexa QA 56 for trimming and removing of Illumina adaptors using a Phred score >20 and minimum fragment length of 50 bp. Taxonomic annotation at the species level of the microbial community for each sample was metagenome using k-mer analysis with kraken2 (Table 3). SBPs were sampled and inoculated into media that would facilitate the growth of certain types of organisms to generate Solarea Bio enrichments (SBEs). As examples, cultivation with plant filtrates or acetate enriched broth can enrich for microbes capable of growth on plant substrates or low pH-tolerant microbes.
  • The sieved samples were also diluted and plated onto media that is non-selective, such as tryptic soy agar, or plated on media that is selective for a given microbial type. For example, fungi can be isolated from a sample by plating on a medium such as potato dextrose agar with added chlorotetracycline to prevent bacterial growth. Likewise, bacteria can be isolated away from yeast by added selective agents such as cycloheximide to the medium.
  • Single colonies were then selected and purified by sequential streak isolations or single cell sorting by FACS to generate Solarea Bio isolates (SBIs). These isolates were then assigned a preliminary identification by 16S rDNA or ITS sequencing (Table 4) for bacteria or fungi respectively, before in depth sequencing analysis.
    • Example 2: Sequencing: Genomic, RNA, Protein
  • The highest throughput method of determining microbial therapeutic potential begins with bioinformatic analyses. Through sequencing of isolated microbial candidates, it is possible to identify microbes with potentially beneficial phenotypes.
  • Whole-genome sequencing: whole-genome sequencing was performed using the Oxford Nanopore and Illumina systems. Microbes grown in pure culture were centrifuged at 4000×rpm for 10 min to remove supernatant. Genomic DNA was isolated from microbial pellets via column-based commercial genomic isolation kits, such as the Zymo Quick-DNA miniprep plus kit. DNA quality and concentration were measured using Nanodrop and Picogreen fluorescent quantification. DNA libraries were built using the Nextera Flex library preparation kit (Illumina) and the Nanopore Genomic DNA by Ligation kit (SQK-LSK110). DNA sequencing was performed using an Illumina MiSeq instrument using a 2×250 bp flow cell and the MinION Oxford Nanopore device. Illumina raw paired-end reads were processed for quality control with Solexa QA (Cox et al. 2010) for trimming and removing of Illumina adaptors using a Phred score >20 and minimum fragment length of 50 bp. Quality-filtered reads were de novo assembled using IDBA-UD (Peng et al. 2012) with pre-corrections and the percent of contamination and genome completeness were assessed based on recovery of lineage-specific marker genes using CheckM (Parks et al. 2015). Nanopore raw sequencing data was converted into a nucleic acid sequence through the “guppy_basecaller” command line software. Library barcodes were removed, and individual reads were separated by source through the “porechop” demultiplexing tool (https://github.com/rrwick/Porechop). Following demultiplexing, assembly of contigs was preformed through the “flye” assembly tool v1.8 (Kolmogorov et al. 2019) and assembly polish using Medaka v0.12.1 (https://github.com/nanoporetech/medaka). Error correction of the assembled contigs was performed using the Illumina sequencing reads with Pilon v1.23 (https://github.com/broadinstitute/pilon).
  • RNA sequencing: RNA transcripts from microbial candidates described above may also be sequenced. Microbes grown in pure culture are pelleted as above and the resulting pellet undergoes RNA extraction to isolate the total cellular RNA. RNA isolation is performed using a column-based commercial RNA isolation kit, such as the Zymo Research Quick RNA Microprep kit. Isolated RNA is then treated with DNAse to remove potential contaminating genomic DNA. Following DNAse inactivation at 65° C., the isolated RNA undergoes reverse transcriptase reactions, utilizing universal random primers to produce cDNA of specific products. These cDNA products are sequenced through Nanopore or Illumina based sequencing, as above.
    • Example 3: Annotation of Genomes
  • Once a microbial genome has been sequenced it is possible to determine its capacity to produce potentially therapeutic metabolites and compounds. Genome annotation was performed to determine the microbe's taxonomy and gene content. To determine the genes, present within each individual genome, the command line software tool, prokka, was used. The assembled contig information derived from genomic sequencing is input into prokka, which initially identifies the locations of all protein coding sequences, after which coding sequences are annotated as specific genes based on a database of all non-fragment Uniprot entries that have transcript evidence (Apeweiler et al., 2004). identified. To identify specific genes-of-interest that may not be annotated due to low homology, the BLAST+ command line application was used. A genes-of-interest database was constructed, which contains orthologous genes-of-interest from different species. A non-comprehensive list of genes within this database is included in Table 5. Genes-of-interest have included the gene pathways involved in short chain fatty acid (propionate and butyrate) biogenesis, indole (indole-3-acetic acid and indole propionic acid), Gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), surfactants (surfactin, nisin, fengycin, and iturin), dopamine, secondary bile acids, exopolysaccharide proteins (EPS), and omega 3 fatty acids biosynthesis.
    • Example 4: Identification of Enzymes Involved in Production of Immunomodulatory Compounds
  • Microbes including bacteria and fungi are known to produce compounds with immunomodulatory and anti-inflammatory properties including but not limited to short chain fatty acids (SCFA), indoles and indole derivatives, anti-microbial compounds, neurotransmitters such as GABA, serotonin, and dopamine, extracellular polymeric substances (EPS), biosurfactants, secondary bile acids, and polyunsaturated fatty acids. To screen for these compounds in silico, enzyme commission (EC) numbers and amino acid reference sequences were identified for each potential biosynthetic pathway for the production of compounds of interest (Table 5). The genes-of-interest database was blasted against the amino acid sequences from the genomes with a 60% identity and 60% query aligned region threshold to identify potential homologs (Table 6).
    • Example 5: Expression Levels
  • The presence of genes associated with a beneficial metabolite offer significant predictive power for identifying potentially therapeutic microbes. However, it is important to determine the expression levels of these genes to confirm that the beneficial metabolite will actually be produced. Gene expression levels will be determined by quantitative reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (qRT-PCR).
  • qRT-PCR is a standard laboratory technique wherein gene expression is quantified by direct measurement of RNA levels. Microbes grown in pure culture under a variety of conditions and media types. These pure cultures are pelleted by centrifugation at 4000×rpm for 10 min and the resulting pellet undergoes RNA extraction to isolate the total cellular RNA as described in Example 2. Additionally, RNA is DNAse treated as in Example 2. The isolated RNA undergoes reverse transcriptase reactions, utilizing universal random primers, to produce complementary DNA (cDNA) of the entire transcriptome. cDNA is then amplified through qPCR using primers specific to the gene-of-interest from Table 5 qPCR directly quantifies the amount of cDNA and thereby the starting quantity of the RNA transcript-of-interest, determining its expression levels.
    • Example 6: Measurement of Microbially Produced Compounds
  • The levels of microbially produced metabolites was examined in vitro. Individual microbes are grown in pure culture, after which the microbially conditioned supernatant were examined for different metabolites including short chain fatty acids, indole derivatives, antimicrobial compounds, and neurotransmitters. Additionally, the ability of microbes to produce extracellular polymeric substances was examined.
  • Short chain fatty acid quantification: Short chain fatty acids (SCFA) including acetate, propionate, and butyrate, are produced as a result of anaerobic bacterial fermentation of dietary fibers within the intestine and especially within the colon (Macfarlane et al., 2003). SCFAs have different modes of action on both local and systemic regulation of the immune system. SCFAs regulate and improve the intestinal barrier function by upregulation of the expression of tight junctions (Caffaratti et al., 2021). SCFAs also play an important role in T-cell functioning via regulation of G-protein-coupled receptors (GPCRs) and inhibition of histone deacetylase (HDAC) (Caffaratti et al., 2021). One of the most well described and potent anti-inflammatory properties of SCFAs is their capacity to promote regulatory T cells (Tregs) which suppress the activity of effector T cells (Postler et al., 2017). SCFA also inhibit the production of proinflammatory cytokines including TNF-α, IL-6, and IL-1β from intestinal macrophages to reduce local and systemic inflammation (Caffaratti et al., 2021). To measure short chain fatty acid production microbes were grown in pure culture under anaerobic conditions. The microbially conditioned supernatant was then examined by gas chromatography (GC) for the presence of acetate, butyrate, and propionate as previously described (Scortichini et al., 2020). Results for short chain fatty acid production from a selection of examined organisms can be found in Table 7.
  • Indole derivatives: In the intestine, tryptophan (Trp) can be metabolized into indole derivatives by the intestinal microbiota that can act as ligands for the aryl hydrocarbon receptor (AhR) in host cells to impact the immune response (Caffaratti et al., 2021, Postler et al., 2017). Indole derivatives including but not limited to indole, indole acetic acid (IAA), and indole propionic acid (IPA) can modulate the production of IL-22, an important mediator of intestinal homeostasis, as well as suppress the activation of NF-κB and proinflammatory cytokine production while simultaneously increase the production of or anti-inflammatory cytokines to reduce inflammation in the host (Gao et al., 2018). For example, in vitro studies have demonstrated the ability of indole to reduce TNF-α mediated activation of NF-κB, expression of the proinflammatory cytokine IL-8, and induce the production of the anti-inflammatory cytokine IL-10 in HCT-8 cells (Bansal et al., 2010). Thus, screeinging for microbes that produce indole metabolites will lead to the discovery of microbes with probiotic potential. To detect the presence of indole derivatives from microbes, conditioned supernatant was examined by both Kovacs and Salkowski tests, two standard biochemical tests that are commonly used to identify the presence of indole-containing compounds (Sethi et al., 2021). Results for indole derivative production from a selection of examined organisms can be found in Table 7.
  • Antimicrobial compounds: Antimicrobial compounds such as bacteriocins and antibacterial peptides serve multiple purposes including reducing pathogenic microbes associated with disease pathology and reducing the inflammatory response (Jenab et al., 2020). Bacteriocins such as microcin have been shown to increase the production of anti-inflammatory cytokines in intestinal cell lines co-treated with pathogenic E. coli and downregulating TNF through NF-κB inhibition (Yu et al., 2018). Further, bacteriocins produced by Lactobacillus rhamnosus with antibacterial effect showed significant inhibitory effects on S. aureus biofilm formation and decreased the level of the proinflammatory mediators, C Reactive Protein (CRP) and IL-6, in the serum following surgery (Zhou et al., 2017). The ability of potentially therapeutic microbes to produce of antimicrobial compounds, such as bacteriocins, will be determined in screeing assays. Briefly, supernatant, conditioned by potentially therapeutic microbes, was incubated with potentially pathogenic microbes, for example: Klebsiella pneumoniae and Porphyromonas gingivalis. The growth of the potential pathogens was overtime through measurement of optical density. Through this system the production of antimicrobial compound by individual microbes was determined as previously described (Vijayakumar et al., 2015). Results for antimicrobial compound production from a selection of examined organisms can be found in Table 7.
  • Neurotransmitters: Microbially produced neurotransmitters including serotonin, gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), and dopamine affect host physiology and immunity through various mechanisms. Serotonin is synthesized from tryptophan (Trp) through a two-stage enzymatic reaction involving Trp hydroxylase and aromatic amino acid decarboxylase. In humans, approximately 90% of serotonin is located in the enterochromaffin cells of the GI tract where it promotes intestinal peristalsis (Gao et al., 2018). In an anti-inflammatory role, serotonin has been shown to induce T-cell differentiation into Tregs as well as promoting inflammatory Th17 cells to differentiate into Tregs. Th17 cells are an inflammatory T-cell that secrete IL-17 and have been implicated in autoinflammatory diseases including but not limited rheumatoid arthritis (Further, serotonin has been shown to reduce the production of IL-17 from Th17 cells and increase the production of IL-10 from Tregs, promoting an anti-inflammatory environment (Wan et al., 2020). GABA is an inhibitory neurotransmitter in the central nervous system, but also exerts important functions in the immune system. GABA has been shown to macrophage mediated inflammation, and induce the production of Tregs. GABA has also been shown to decrease IL-1β mediated inflammation and increase production of tight junctions in epithelial cells, improving intestinal barrier function (Caffaratti et al., 2021, Jin et al., 2011). Dopamine, a catecholamine, is abundantly present within the human intestinal tract in part due to microbial production (Sandrini et al., 2015). The bacterium Enterococci faecalis has been shown to produce the neurotransmitter dopamine from the metabolite, L-3,4 dihydroxyphenylalanine (L-dopa) (Villageliú et al., 2018). Furthermore, dopamine is recognized as a potent immunomodulatory compound (Pinoli et al., 2017; Jenab et al., 2020). Dopamine reduces systemic inflammation through inhibition of the NLRP3 inflammasome, a proinflammatory signaling cascade, associated with robust secretion of proinflammatory mediators (Yan et al., 2015). Dopamine was found to reduce neutrophil mediated reactive oxygen species production, and even inhibit neutrophil activation by the highly potent activator N-formyl-methionyl-leucyl-phenylalanine (Yamazaki et al., 1989). Additionally, treatment with dopamine receptor agonists has been shown to reduce the levels of the pro-inflammatory cytokines IL-6 and IL-8 in serum (Alduri et al., 2010). To screen for microbes that produce these neurotransmitters, microbially conditioned supernatant is quantified via ELISA, as previously described (An et al., 2020). Alternatively, high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) can be used to quantify neurotransmitter production by potentially therapeutic microbes as has been described previously (Reinhoud et al., 2013).
  • Extracellular polymeric substances: Extracellular polymeric substances (EPS) are a diverse group of polymers composed mainly of polysaccharides, proteins, and DNA, that have been shown to have potent immunomodulatory effects (Costa et al., 2018, Jin et al., 2019). EPS producing strains have a variety of or health benefits for their hosts including anti-inflammatory, antioxidant, antitumor, and stress-tolerant effects (Jin et al., 2019). EPS from Bacillus subtilis has been shown to induce an anti-inflammatory M2 macrophage response to prevent T-cell mediated diseases (Paynich et al., 2017). EPS from Bifidobacterium longum decreases IFNγ, IL-12, TNF-α, IL-17, and IL-6 production and protects against the T-cell transfer model of colitis (Hsieh et al., 2020). EPS from Faecalibacterium prausnitzii decreases IFNγ and IL-12 while increasing IL-10 secretion through TLR-2 to attenuate the DSS model of colitis (Hsieh et al., 2020). These are just a few examples of the anti-inflammatory capabilities of microbially produced EPS. To screen for microbially produced EPS, microbes were grown on media containing the carbohydrate indicating dyes congo red or aniline blue. The presence of colorimetric changes within the microbial colony and the surrounding media indicates the presence of extracellular polymeric substances as demonstrated previously (Ruhmann et al., 2015). Results for EPS production from a selection of examined organisms can be found in Table 7.
  • Biosurfactants: Biosurfactants are a class of amphipathic molecule produced by microbes. In nature these substances improve nutrient solubility, which improves nutrient acquisition and absorption. In addition to their benefit to microbes biosurfactants have several features that make them potentially desirable compounds for probiotics (Jenab et al., 2020). Biosurfactants have been shown to have anti-inflammatory properties. The biosurfactant produced by Bacillus licheniformis VS16 has been shown to reduce the expression of pro-inflammatory cytokines, such as TNF-α and IL-1β, while also increasing the expression of the anti-inflammatory cytokines IL-10 and TGF-β (Giri et al., 2017). Additionally, surfactin, a biosurfactant produced by Bacillus subtilis has been shown to reduce the expression of the pro-inflammatory mediators IL-1β, iNOS, and TNF-α in LPS stimulated macrophages (Zhang et al., 2015).
  • Biosurfactant production by microbes are determined through two methods: blood agar lysis and lipid droplet spreading assays (Morikawa et al., 2000; Mulligan et al., 1984). Pure microbial cultures are grown on sheep blood agar. Agar will be checked daily for signs of hemolysis. Hemolysis indicates the potential presence of a biosurfactant (Mulligan et al., 1984). A lipid droplet spreading assay is utilized to confirm biosurfactant production by that microbe. A hemolysin positive microbial strain is grown in pure liquid culture. 10 μL of microbe-conditioned supernatant is applied to 40 mL of water overlain with a 10 μL layer of mineral oil. The presence of biosurfactants within the supernatant results in a zone of clearance around the applied supernatant. The diameter of clearance produced by this technique linearly correlates to the quantity of biosurfactant within the supernatant (Morikawa et al., 2000).
  • Secondary bile acids: Bile acids are sterol compounds produced by the human body to assist in the solubilization of lipids and other hydrophobic nutrients within the gastrointestinal tract. Select microbes have been shown to metabolize the human produced primary bile acids, cholic and chenodeoxycholic acid, into secondary bile acids, including but not limited to lithocholic and deoxycholic acid (Heinken et al., 2019). Secondary bile acids have been shown to have anti-inflammatory properties (Fiorucci et al., 2018). Anti-inflammatory properties/effects in a human subject include, but are not limited to reduction in symptoms of acute inflammation such as fever, fatigue, headaches, etc. and symptoms of chronic inflammation, such as, but not limited to, gastrointestinal complications (e.g., diarrhea or constipation), weight gain, weight loss, fatigue, persistent infection, cancer and/or stroke. Secondary bile acids are known to signal through both the FXR and TGR5 receptors. These receptors result in powerful immunoregulatory responses. FXR knockout mice have been shown to have increased expression of pro-inflammatory cytokines: IL-1β, IL-2, IL-6, TNF-α, and IFNγ (Fiorucci et al., 2018; Vavassori et al., 2009). Additionally, TGR5 agonism has been shown to reduce proinflammatory cytokine expression by IFNγ stimulated macrophages (Yoneno et al., 2013). Furthermore, it has been shown that FXR signaling reduces synthesis of the pro-inflammatory mediator prostaglandin E2, while bile acid signaling through TGR5 reduces activation of the NLRP3 inflammasome, a signaling cascade that would otherwise result in further inflammatory signals.
  • To determine and quantify microbial production of secondary bile acids signaling pathway induction and liquid chromatography-linked mass spectrometry (LC-MS) is utilized. Pure microbial culture is grown in liquid media in the presence of primary bile acids. Microbially-conditioned supernatants are then filtered to remove organisms. FXR- and TGR5-expressing epithelial cells are then incubated with supernatants. To determine FXR/TGR5 activation, and thus the presence of secondary bile acids, qRT-PCR, as previously described. Using primers specific to FXR/TGR5-controled genes, such as the intestinal bile acid binding protein (IBABP) gene for FXR and caudal-type homeobox 2 (CDX2) for TGR5, the downstream signaling events and thus presence of secondary bile acids is determined (Wang et al., 2008; Ni et al., 2020). To differentiate and quantify secondary bile acids LC-MS is used. Microbes are grown in the presence of bile acids. The resulting supernatant is harvested and filtered. Supernatants are analyzed by LC-MS to identify and quantify any secondary bile acids that are produced by the microbe of interest.
  • Omega fatty acids: Omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids are unsaturated fatty acids and precursor molecules for the eicosanoid family of immunomodulatory lipid mediators (Gutierrez S, 2019). This family of immunological signaling molecules includes prostaglandins and leukotrienes. These compounds are found in several forms which can be pro-inflammatory or anti-inflammatory. Omega-3 fatty acids, including eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA) and Docosahexaenoic acid (DHA) selectively induce the production of anti-inflammatory prostaglandins, while actively inhibiting the synthesis of the pro-inflammatory mediators prostaglandin E2 and leukotriene B4 (Kang et al., 2008). Conversely, omega-6 fatty acids, such as arachidonic acid, selectively induce the production of these same pro-inflammatory mediators. As such, the ratio of omega-3 to omega-6 fatty acids can be diagnostic in determining a microbe's inflammatory profile, where microbes that produce more omega-3 and less omega-6 acids are more anti-inflammatory (Bagga et al., 2003).
  • To detect, differentiate, and quantify omega fatty acids GC-FID is used. Pure microbial culture is cultivated in liquid culture. Microbial supernatant is collected and filtered to remove microbes. This supernatant is then analyzed by GC, which has the capability to detect, differentiate, and quantify the omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids within the sample.
    • Example 7: In Vitro Testing of Single Organisms for Functionality
  • Following the in silico identification of organisms with therapeutic potential, it is vital to experimentally confirm the desired phenotypes. To develop probiotics with novel therapeutic potential, individual microbes are grown in pure culture. After which, these individual organisms are screened for the appropriate phenotype utilizing several culture-based assays. Microbes are screened directly for their ability to adhere to both mucus and mammalian epithelial cells. Microbially conditioned supernatant is examined for the presence of immunomodulating compounds.
  • Mucoadherence: Microbial adherence to the gastrointestinal tract is an important mechanism through which commensal microbes improve gut health. As all mucosal surfaces are covered in a layer of mucus, microbialmicrobe adherence to the mucus, hereafter referred to as mucoadherence, is the first important step in this process. It has been shown that probiotic mucoadherence competitively inhibits pathogen access to binding sites on mucosal surfaces (Walsham et al., 2016). Additionally, mucoadherence is thought to increase retention of probiotic microbes, increasing their potential to benefit the host (Han et al., 2021). To quantify mucoadherence, microbes were labeled with a live cell-compatible fluorescent dye, for example Sybr green. These microbes were then incubated in mucin conjugated plates. Total microbial fluorescence was measured via spectroscopy. Unbound bacteria were washed away and the fluorescence due to bound bacteria will be measured and used to calculate the percentage of total microbes that are bound to the mucin.
  • Epithelial adherence: In addition to mucoaherence the ability of microbes to bind to gut-derived epithelial cells was examined. Like mucoadherence, microbial adherence to epithelial cells has been shown to competitively inhibit epithelial adherence by pathogens, such as Staphylococcus aureus, Escherichia coli, and Enterococcus faecium (Monteagudo-Mera et al., 2019; Walsham et al., 2016; Zhang et al., 2015). Additionally, the close interaction between probiotic microbes and epithelial cells can induce immunological changes in the epithelial cell (Monteagudo-Mera et al., 2019). For example, it has been shown that Lactobacillus rhamnosus binding to epithelial cells is required to reduce IL-8 mRNA levels in Caco-2 cells, indicating that adherence is required for immunological modulation (Lebeer et al., 2012).
  • Caco-2 cells are gut-derived epithelial cells that have been used to study epithelial adherence by probiotic microbes (Grootaert et al., 2011) To determine the ability of microbes to bind to mammalian epithelial cells, microbes were incubated with confluent monolayers Caco-2 epithelial cells. Unbound microbes were then washed off. The epithelial cells were lysed, via a detergent-based lysis buffer, leaving viable bacteria. The surviving microbes were then quantified by plating, resulting in colony forming units (CFUs) bound to the monolayer, which was compared to the number of CFUs incubated in each well to determine the binding efficiency.
  • Immunomodulatory compounds: As described in Example 4 microbes were examined for their ability to produce metabolites known to be anti-inflammatory in the host. Strains that were positive for the production of these compounds are prioritized for testing of their anti-inflammatory functionality. To empirically test the immunomodulatory capacity of these prioritized strains in vitro, mammalian immune cells are treated with microbially conditioned supernatant. Human U937 cells are myelocyte lineage cells which can be differentiated into macrophage-like cells with ionophores, such as phorbol 12-myristate 13-acetate (PMA). PMA differentiated U937 macrophages are incubated with microbially conditioned supernatant. The subsequent immune response is analyzed by enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and/or qRT-PCR to quantify the specific cytokines including but not limited to TNF-α, IL-1β, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-21, IL-22, IL-21, IL-27 IFNγ, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIF, LIX, MCP-1 that are produced in response to the microbial supernatant. Through examination of the pro- and anti-inflammatory cytokines that are produced by these immune cells the effect of the microbes of interest on the immune system is discerned.
  • Specific immunomodulatory pathways are also examined. The aryl hydrocarbon receptor (AHR) is receptor found on epithelial cells of the gastrointestinal tract that is known to induce anti-inflammatory immune signaling in response to indole derivatives and other microbial metabolites (Postler et al., 2017). Utilizing an AHR reporter system activation of this signaling pathway is examined as previously described (Marinelli et al., 2018). Microbially conditioned supernatant is produced as described in Example 7. This supernatant is then incubated with HT29 human cells containing an AHR luciferase reporter system, wherein the luciferase gene is under the control of an AHR controlled promoter. Supernatant that stimulates AHR signaling induces expression of the luciferase reporter gene. Luciferase activity is measured spectroscopically to quantify AHR signaling induced by the supernatant.
  • Other immunomodulatory pathways that are examined are the Toll-Like Receptor (TLR) pathways. TLRs are immunological receptors that detect specific microbial molecular patterns. In response to stimulation by their ligands, these receptors can promote pro- and anti-inflammatory responses. Of specific interest are the TLR heterodimers TLR1/TLR2 and TLR2/TLR6 and the homodimers TLR4 and TLR5. It has been shown that the TLR2-based heterodimers can induce the production of the anti-inflammatory cytokine, IL-10, upon binding to microbial cell wall components (Cario E, 2004; Jang S, 2004; Saraiva M, 2010; Nguyen B, 2020). Additionally, while TLR4 and TLR5 are often thought of as pro-inflammatory receptors, studies have indicated that TLR4 activation can lead to secretion of IL-10 resulting in the maturation of regulatory T cells to control the inflammatory response (Higgins S, 2003. Furthermore, TLR5 signaling is critical for maintenance of the epithelial barrier within the gastrointestinal tract. TLR5 activation by commensal bacteria has been shown to inhibit general inflammation within the gut. The loss of TLR5 expression from intestinal epithelial cells has been shown to increase inflammation and epithelial permeability within the gastrointestinal tract (Vijay-Kumar et al., 2007, Chassaing et al., 2015). Reporter cell lines, such as the HEK-Blue TLR5 reporter line (Invivogen, San Diego, Ca), are used to demonstrate TLR signaling in response to microbial ligands. Microbes are grown in pure culture. These microbes or microbially-conditioned supernatant are used to treat human cells that contain a reporter gene has been placed under the control of a TLR controlled reporter. When the TLR becomes activated by a microbe or secreted microbial compound, the reporter gene is expressed producing a measurable result.
    • Example 8: DMA Formulation and In Vitro Testing of DMA Functionality
  • Microbes in nature generally interact with multiple other groups and form consortia that work in synergy, exchanging metabolic products and substrates resulting in thermodynamically favorable reactions as compared to the individual metabolism. For example, in the human colon, the process for plant fiber depolymerization, digestion and fermentation into butyrate is achieved by multiple metabolic groups working in concert. This type of synergy is reproduced in the DMA concept where strains are selected to be combined based on their ability to synergize to produce anti-inflammatory compounds when exposed to substrates such as plant fibers, tryptophan, or sucrose.
  • To experimentally describe the process of DMA validation the following method is applied to find candidates applicable for specific products:
  • Define a suitable habitat where microbes are with desirable attributes are abundant based on ecological hypotheses. For example, fresh vegetables are known to have anti-inflammatory effects when consumed in a whole-food plant-based diet, and therefore, it is likely they harbor microbes that can colonize the human gut.
  • Apply a selection filter to isolate and characterize only those microbes capable of a relevant function. For example, EPS production, mucoadherence and pathogen killing. In addition, strains need to be compatible with target therapeutic drugs.
  • Selected strains are then cultivated in vitro and their genomes sequenced at 100× coverage to assemble, annotate and use in predictive genome-wide metabolic models.
  • Predict microbial functions in silico and validate experimentally using the phenotypic methods described in Example 4.
  • Microbes with complementary or predicted synergistic functions are then combined. Drawing from the example strains in tables 6 and Y, a DMA could be assembled from microbes with complementary functions such as Paraclostridium benzoelyticum that produces abundant SCFAs but does not produce any other ant-inflammatory targets and Exiguobacterium sp., which produces IAA, inhibits pathogens, and produces EPS. Alternatively, microbes such as Brevibacterium sp. and Exiguobacterium sp. produce anti-pathogenic elements that could synergize to enhance pathogen killing. These two organisms belong to distinct phyla (actinobacteria and firmicutes respectively), meaning they likely harbor different antimicrobial products which may act via different, complementary mechanisms.
  • Test predicted synergistic combinations in the laboratory for validation. Single strains are grown to produce a biomass and the spent growth media removed after reaching late log or stationary phase. The washed cells are then combined in Defined Microbial Assemblages with 2-10 different strains per DMA and incubated using a culture media with prebiotic substances and precursors including but not limited to tryptophan, mono or oligosaccharides, fruit or vegetable powders that promote anti-inflammatory product formation.
  • Analyze the DMAs for their anti-inflammatory efficacy in the range of assays described in Examples 6 and 7 for synergistic effects produced by the combined assemblage as compared to the individual contributors.
    • Example 9: Preclinical Validation of DMA Efficacy Aged Mice (Inflammaging)
  • Our lead candidate DMAs are evaluated for their therapeutic efficacy in a mouse model of aging-associated inflammation. All mice are group housed with 5 mice per cage in individually ventilated cages (IVCs) specifically designed for germ free husbandry. After an acclimation period, baseline samples of feces and blood are collected, and baseline measures of body mass are recorded. After baseline measures are recorded. 18-month-old C57bl/6J male and female are randomly divided into groups and dosed by hi-daily oral gavage of water (negative control), DMA #1 (DMA1), DMA #2 (DMA2), DMA #3 (DMA3), DMA #4 (DMA4), or DMA #5 (DMA5) for a period of 6-weeks. Bi-weekly fecal samples are collected to monitor the functional and taxonomic composition of the gut microbiome over time. 1-week prior to sacrifice, fasted animals receive an oral gavage of FITC-dextran, and a blood sample will be collected 4-hours later to measure gut permeability. After the 6-week dosing period, tissues are collected from each mouse for downstream analysis as follows.
  • Metagenomic analysis of fecal pellets: DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Research, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA). DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq 51 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2×150 bp paired end run. Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp. Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
  • Gut permeability analysis: Following FITC-dextran administration to fasted mice, blood will be retro-orbitally collected after 4 hours, and fluorescence intensity will be measured on fluorescence plates using an excitation wavelength of 493 nm and an emission wavelength of 518 nm as previously described (Thevaranjan et al., 2017).
  • Circulating pro- and anti-inflammatory cytokine analysis: Blood is collected from each mouse into EDTA treated tubes at the time of sacrifice, and plasma is separated from cells. Cells are saved for peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis. Plasma samples are analyzed by ELISA or Multiplex assay for circulating inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to CRP, TNF-α, IL-10, IL-2, IL-4, IL-5, IL 6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, Th-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-17, IL-21, IL-23, IL-27 IFNγ, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIF, LIX, MCP-1, M-CSF, MIG, MIP-2, MIP-3, RANTES, RANKL and VEGF as previously described (Schott et al., 2018).
  • Peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis: PBMC populations are analyzed by flow cytometry as previously described (Rao et al., 2012). Anticoagulat treated blood undergoes density gradient centrifugation in Ficol to isolate PBMC populations from granulocytes, erythrocytes, and platelets. After which, PBMCS are washed thoroughly and resuspended in FACS buffer. Following resuspension cells undergo Fc (Constant Fragment) blocking to obstruct antibody binding to cellular Fc receptors. Cell suspensions are then treated with unique fluorescent antibodies that are specific for immunophenotyping markers. For instance, CD3 antibodies and CD19 antibodies would be used to label T and B respectively. Through this process T cells, T cell subsets, B cells, monocytes, dendritic cells, phagocyte subsets, natural killer cells and other cellular populations, as deemed relevant, are analyzed.
  • Bone marrow and splenic immune cell analysis: Bone marrow aspirates and spleens are collected for immune cell phenotyping by flow cytometry and RNAseq as previously described (Tyagi et al., 2018). Upon collection, samples are split in half and either flash frozen for RNA analysis or immediately processed for flow cytometry. Samples are processed for flow cytometry as described for PBMCs, with the addition that spleens are homogenized either mechanically or enzymatically prior to washing and resuspension in FACS buffer.
  • Colonic tissue isolation for RNA and protein analysis: Two cm sections of proximal colonic tissue and two cm sections of terminal ileum tissue are isolated, split in half, and flash frozen for RNA and protein evaluation of tight junctions and claudins, critical mediators of gut barrier integrity, as well as inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to TNF-α, IL-17, IFNγ and IL-1β. RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR, and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the aforementioned proteins of interest (Li et al., 2016).
    • Rheumatoid Arthritis
  • Our lead candidate DMAs are evaluated for their therapeutic efficacy in a mouse model of rheumatoid arthritis (RA) and a delayed type hypersensitivity model. For the mouse model of RA, all mice are group housed with 3-5 mice per cage in individually ventilated cages (IVCs) specifically designed for germ free husbandry. Adult male and female DBA/1 mice are randomly allocated to experimental groups and allowed to acclimate for two weeks. After an acclimation period, baseline samples of feces and blood are collected, and baseline measures of body mass are recorded. On Day 0, animals are administered by subcutaneous injection with 100 microliters of an emulsion containing 100 micrograms of type II collagen (CII) in incomplete's Freund's adjuvant supplemented with 4 mg/ml Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra. On Day 21, animals are administered by subcutaneous injection with a booster emulsion containing 100 μg, of type II collagen in incomplete Freund's adjuvant. Beginning from day −14 and continuing through day-45 (end of experiment), mice are dosed by hi-daily oral gavage of water (negative control), DMA #1 (DMA1), DMA #2 (DMA2), DMA #3 (DMA3), DMA #4 (DMA4), or DMA #5 (DMA5). From Day −44 until the end of the experiment on Day 45, animals are weighed three times per week. From Day 21 until the end of the experiment, animals are scored three times per week for clinical signs of arthritis to include swelling of the hind- and front paws, radio-carpal (wrist) joints and tibio-tarsal (ankle) joints. At the end of the experiment on day 45, mice are euthanized, and tissues are collected from each mouse for downstream analysis as follows.
  • Circulating pro- and anti-inflammatory cytokine analysis: Blood is collected from each mouse into EDTA treated tubes at the time of sacrifice, and plasma is separated from cells. Cells are saved for peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis, Plasma samples are analyzed by ELISA or Multiplex assay for circulating inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to CRP, TNF-α, IL-1β, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-13, IL-15, IL-21, IL-22, IL-23, IL-27 IFNγ, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIF, LIX, MCP-1, M-CSF, MIG, MIP-1α, MIP-1β, MIP-2, MIP-3, RANTES, RANKL and VEGF as previously described (Schott et al., 2018).
  • Peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis: PBMC populations are analyzed by flow cytometry as previously described (Rao et al., 2012). Anticoagulant treated blood undergoes density gradient centrifugation in Ficol to isolate PBMC populations from granulocytes, erythrocytes, and platelets. After which, PBMCS are washed thoroughly and resuspended in FACS buffer. Following resuspension cells undergo Fe (Constant Fragment) blocking to obstruct antibody binding to cellular Fc receptors. Cell suspensions are then treated with unique fluorescent antibodies that are specific for immunophenotyping markers. For instance, CD3 antibodies and C1719 antibodies would be used to label T and B cells, respectively. Through this process T cells, T cell subsets, B cells, monocytes, dendritic cells, phagocyte subsets, natural killer cells and other cellular populations, as deemed relevant, are analyzed.
  • Bone marrow and splenic immune cell analysis: Bone marrow aspirates and spleens are collected for immune cell phenotyping by flow cytometry and RNAseq as previously described (Tyagi et al., 2018), Upon collection, samples are split in half and either flash frozen for RNA analysis or immediately processed for flow cytometry. Samples are processed for flow cytometry as described for PBMCs, with the addition that spleens are homogenized either mechanically or enzymatically prior to washing and resuspension in FACS buffer.
  • Colonic tissue isolation for RNA and protein analysis: Two cm sections of proximal colonic tissue and two cm sections of terminal ileum tissue are isolated, split in half, and flash frozen for RNA and protein evaluation of tight junctions and claudins, critical mediators of gut barrier integrity, as well as inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to TNF-α, IL-17, IFNγ and IL-1β. RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR, and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the aforementioned proteins of interest (Li et al., 2016).
  • Metagenomic analysis of fecal pellets: DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Reserch, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA). DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq S1 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2×150 bp paired end run. Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp. Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
  • Histopathology: At the end of the experiment, hind paws are stored in tissue fixative. Samples are transferred into decalcification solution, and tissue samples are processed, sectioned, and stained with Haematoxylin Eosin. Sections are scored by a qualified histopathologist, blind to the experimental design, for signs of arthritis to include inflammation, articular cartilage damage and damage to the underlying metaphyseal bone. A detailed scoring system is used (see below). Data will be graphed (Mean±SEM). Raw and analysed data will be provided as well as representative pictures.
  • TABLE 9
    Histopathology Scoring System
    Type Grade Description
    Inflammation
    0 Normal Joint
    Inflammation
    1 Mild synovial hyperplasia
    with inflammation
    dominated by neutrophils.
    Low numbers of neutrophils
    and macrophages in joint
    space
    Inflammation
    2 Synovial hyperplasia with
    moderate to marked
    inflammation involving both
    neutrophils and
    macrophages. Neutrophils
    and macrophages in joint
    space; may be some necrotic
    tissue debris
    Inflammation
    3 Synovial hyperplasia with
    marked inflammation
    involving both neutrophils
    and macrophages. Loss of
    synoviocyte lining
    Inflammation may extend
    from synovium to
    surrounding tissue including
    muscle. Numerous
    neutrophils and
    macrophages in joint space,
    together with significant
    necrotic tissue debris
    Articular
    0 Normal joint
    cartilage damage
    Articular
    1 Articular cartilage shows
    cartilage damage only mild degenerative
    change Early pannus
    formation may be present
    peripherally.
    Articular 2 Articular cartilage shows
    cartilage damage moderate degenerative
    change and focal loss.
    Pannus formation is present
    focally
    Articular 3 Significant disruption and
    cartilage damage loss of articular cartilage
    with extensive pannus
    formation
    Damage to the 0 Normal joint
    underlying
    metaphyseal bone
    Damage to the 1 No change to underlying
    underlying metaphyseal bone
    metaphyseal bone
    Damage to the 2 May be focal necrosis or
    underlying fibrosis of metaphyseal
    metaphyseal bone bone.
    Damage to the 3 Disruption or collapse of
    underlying metaphyseal bone. Extensive
    metaphyseal bone inflammation, necrosis or
    fibrosis extending to
    medullary space of the
    metaphysis
    • Delayed Type Hypersensitivity Model of RA:
  • In addition to the mouse model of RA study described above, a delayed type hypersensitivity study for RA is conducted in mice, and is conducted as follows. The studies are conducted in a BSL-1, quarantined room. Mice are acclimated to the facility for 1 week followed by an additional 2 week acclimation with bedding mixing to normalize microbiomes across cages. Fecal microbiome samples are collected 1-2 days prior to mBSA treatment #1. At 8 weeks of age (day 0), animals receive an intra-plantar mBSA (methylated Bovine Serum Albumin) challenge or PBS/Complete fruend's adjuvent (Control) in the right hindpaw. At 8 weeks of age (day 0), immediately following mBSA, animals are treated with either DMAs (twice daily) or Dexamethasone (Dex) 5 mg/kg (once daily). Treatment with DMA or Dex is continued until day 8. Mice receiving DMAs are only gavaged in the morning on day 8. On day 8, mice receive an intra-plantar mBSA challenge or PBS/CFA (control) in the right hind paw after Dex or DMA treatment. Paw swelling is measured on day 9. At the end of the study, the following samples/tissues are collected and further characterized as described above.
  • Organ/material Storage Application
    Blood Plasma: −80° C. Cytokine profiling
    Fecal pellet −80° C. Shotgun metagenomics
    Spleen Half flash frozen, half Immune cell profiling:
    splenocyte prep and Flow
    cyropreserved
    mBSA injected 10% formalin Histopathology,
    paw Immunostaining
  • DMAs are identified that reduce paw inflammation and reduce pro-inflammatory cytokine secretion/detection in blood and injected paw samples.
    • Periodontal Disease (Systemic Delivery)
  • Our lead candidate DMAs are evaluated for their therapeutic efficacy in a mouse model of periodontal disease. All mice are group housed with 5 mice per cage in individually ventilated cages (IVCs) specifically designed for germ free husbandry. After an acclimation period, mice are randomly divided into groups, baseline samples of feces, oral microbiome swab, and blood are collected, and baseline measures of body mass are recorded. On Day 0, periodontitis is induced in 12-month-old C57bl/6J male and female mice using the well described ligature induced periodontal disease model (Aghaloo et al., 2011). Briefly, a sterile wire ligature is placed around the crown of the right first maxillary molar to induce the disease process. Immediately following induction of periodontitis, mice begin bi-daily dosing by oral gavage with water (negative control), DMA #1 (DMA1), DMA #2 (DMA2), DMA #3 (DMA3), DMA #4 (DMA4), or DMA #5 (DMA5) for a period of 8-weeks. Weekly fecal and oral microbiome samples are collected to monitor the functional and taxonomic composition of the gut and oral microbiome over time, After the 8-week dosing period, tissues are collected from each mouse for downstream analysis as follows.
  • Metagenomic analysis of fecal pellets: DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Reserch, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA). DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq S1 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2×150 bp paired end run. Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp. Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
  • Metagenomic analysis of oral microbiome samples: Bacterial DNA extraction is performed using commercially available DNA purification kit (Epicentre MasterPure™) according to manufacturer's guidelines and the DNA concentration will be estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA). DNA library preparation, sequencing, and analysis is carried out as described above.
  • Circulating pro- and anti-inflammatory cytokine analysis: Blood is collected from each mouse into EDTA treated tubes at the time of sacrifice, and plasma is separated from cells. Cells are saved for peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis. Plasma samples are analyzed by ELISA or Multiplex assay for circulating inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to CRP, TNF-α, IL-1β, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-13, IL-15, IL-17, IL-21, IL-22, IL-23, IL-27 IFNγ, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIF, LIX, MCP-1, M-CSF, MIG, MIP-1α, MIP-1β, MIP-2, MIP-3, RANTES, RANKL and VEGF as previously described (Schott et al., 2018).
  • Peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis: PBMC populations are analyzed by flow cytometry as previously described (Rao et al., 2012). Anticoagulant treated blood undergoes density gradient centrifugation in Ficol to isolate PBMC populations from granulocytes, erythrocytes, and platelets. After which, PBMCS are washed thoroughly and resuspended in FACS buffer. Following resuspension cells undergo Fe (Constant Fragment) blocking to obstruct antibody binding to cellular Fc receptors. Cell suspensions are then treated with unique fluorescent antibodies that are specific for immunophenotyping markers. For instance, CD3 antibodies and CD19 antibodies would be used to label T and B cells, respectively. Through this process T cells, T cell subsets, B cells, monocytes, dendritic cells, phagocyte subsets, natural killer cells and other cellular populations, as deemed relevant, are analyzed.
  • Bone marrow and splenic immune cell analysis: Bone marrow aspirates and spleens are collected for immune cell phenotyping by flow cytometry and RNAseq as previously described (Tyagi et al., 2018). Upon collection, samples are split in half and either flash frozen for RNA analysis or immediately processed for flow cytometry. Samples are processed for flow cytometry as described for PBMCs, with the addition that spleens are homogenized either mechanically or enzymatically prior to washing and resuspension in FACS buffer.
  • Colonic tissue isolation for RNA and protein analysis: Two cm sections of proximal colonic tissue and two cm sections of terminal ileum tissue are isolated, split in half, and flash frozen for RNA and protein evaluation of tight junctions and claudins, critical mediators of gut barrier integrity, as well as inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to TNF-α, IL-17, IFNγ and IL-1β. RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR, and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the aforementioned proteins of interest (Li et al., 2016).
  • Micro-computed tomographic (μCT) scanning: To analyze amount of alveolar bone loss following ligature induced periodontal disease, jaw bones are imaged by μCT scanning at 16-μm resolution, and volumetric data are converted to DICOM format and imported Imaging software to generate 3D and multiplanar reconstructed images. To quantify the amount of bone loss induced by experimental periodontal disease, the imaged volume is oriented with the nasal cavity floor parallel to the horizontal plane and the midpalatal suture parallel to the midsagittal plane. Then the volume is angled such that the long axis of the distal root of the first molar and the mesial root of the second molar are vertical to the horizontal plane. Then the distance between the cementoenamel junction and the alveolar bone crest are measured at the center of D1 and M2. To quantitatively assess changes in the width of the buccal alveolar outline on axial slices, the imaged volume is oriented such that the floor of the nasal cavity is parallel to the horizontal plane and the midpalatal suture was parallel to the midsagittal plane. Then the shortest distance from the buccal surface of the root to the buccal outline of the alveolar ridge is measured for the mesial and distal roots of the first and second molars at the level of the hard palate.
  • Histopathology: Bones are decalcified in for 4 to 6 days or in 14.5% EDTA (pH 7.2) for 4 weeks. Samples are then embedded in paraffin, and 5-μm-thick coronal sections at the interproximal area between the first and second maxillary molars are made. Thus each section includes a complete cross section through the entire maxilla, which allows a side-by-side comparison of the bone, teeth, and soft tissues from the ligature (right) and nonligature (left) sites. To quantify the area of osteonecrosis and periosteal thickness, hematoxylin, and eosin (H&E)-stained slides are digitally scanned using the Aperio XT automated slide scanner and the Aperio ImageScope Version 10 software (Aperio Technologies, Inc., Vista, Calif., USA). Areas of osteonecrosis, defined as loss of more than five contiguous osteocytes with confluent areas of empty lacunae, are marked and the total area are calculated by the ImageScope software. The ruler tool in ImageScope is used to measure the greatest area of buccal periosteal thickness on both the ligature and nonligature sides. Numbers of empty and total osteocytic lacunae are counted manually on the digital whole-slide image over a 1-mm-long and 0.25-mm-wide area of bone (length and width measured with the ImageScope ruler tool) at the buccal alveolus adjacent to the D1 root.
  • Protein and cytokine analysis of periodontal tissue: Whole buccal and palatal tissues of maxillary molars are collected. RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR as previously described (Glowackia et al., 2013), and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the cytokines and proteins of interest including but not limited to IL-10, TGF-β, TNF-α, cytotoxic T lymphocyte antigen 4 (CTLA-4), and RANKL.
    • Periodontal Disease (Local Delivery)
  • Our lead candidate DMAs are evaluated for their therapeutic efficacy in a mouse model of periodontal disease. All mice are group housed with 5 mice per cage in individually ventilated cages (WC's) specifically designed for germ free husbandry. After an acclimation period, mice are randomly divided into groups, baseline samples of feces, oral microbiome swab, and blood are collected, and baseline measures of body mass are recorded. On Day 0; periodontitis is induced in 12-month-old. C57bl/6J male and female mice using the well described ligature induced periodontal disease model (Aghaloo et al., 2011). Briefly, a sterile wire ligature is placed around the crown of the right first maxillary molar to induce the disease process. Immediately following induction of periodontitis, mice begin hi-daily dosing by brushing onto the oral site with water (negative control), DMA #1 (DMA1), DMA #2 (DMA2), DMA #3 (DMA3), DMA #4 (DMA4), or DMA #5 (DMA5) for a period of 8-weeks. Weekly fecal and oral microbiome samples are collected to monitor the functional and taxonomic composition of the gut and oral microbiome over time. After the 8-week dosing period, tissues are collected from each mouse for downstream analysis as follows.
  • Metagenomic analysis of fecal pellets: DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Reserch, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA). DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq S1 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2×150 bp paired end run. Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp. Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
  • Metagenomic analysis of oral microbiome samples: Bacterial DNA extraction is performed using commercially available DNA purification kit (Epicentre MasterPure™) according to manufacturer's guidelines and the DNA concentration will be estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA). DNA library preparation, sequencing, and analysis is carried out as described above.
  • Circulating pro- and anti-inflammatory cytokine analysis: Blood is collected from each mouse into EDTA treated tubes at the time of sacrifice, and plasma is separated from cells. Cells are saved for peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis. Plasma samples are analyzed by ELISA or Multiplex assay for circulating inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to CRP, TNF-α, IL-1β, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-17, IL-21, IL-22, IL-23, IL-27 IFNγ, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IP-10, KC, LIE, LIX. MCP-1, M-CSF, MIG, MIP-1α, MIP-1β, MIP-2, MIP-3, RANTES, RANKL and VEGF as previously described (Schott et al., 2018).
  • Peripheral blood mononuclear cell (PBMC) analysis: PBMC populations are analyzed by flow cytometry as previously described (Rao et al., 2012). Anticoagulant treated blood undergoes density gradient centrifugation in Picot to isolate PBMC populations from granulocytes, erythrocytes, and platelets. After which, PBMCS are washed thoroughly and resuspended in FACS buffer. Following resuspension cells undergo Fc (Constant Fragment) blocking to obstruct antibody binding to cellular Fc receptors. Cell suspensions are then treated with unique fluorescent antibodies that are specific for immunophenotyping markers. For instance, CD3 antibodies and CD19 antibodies would be used to label T and B cells, respectively. Through this process T cells, T cell subsets, B cells, monocytes, dendritic cells, phagocyte subsets, natural killer cells and other cellular populations, as deemed relevant, are analyzed.
  • Bone marrow and splenic immune cell analysis: Bone marrow aspirates and spleens are collected for immune cell phenotyping by flow cytometry and RNAseq as previously described (Tyagi et al., 2018). Upon collection, samples are split in half and either flash frozen for RNA analysis or immediately processed for flow cytometry. Samples are processed for flow cytometry as described for PBMCs, with the addition that spleens are homogenized either mechanically or enzymatically prior to washing and resuspension in FACS buffer.
  • Colonic tissue isolation for RNA and protein analysis: Two cm sections of proximal colonic tissue and two cm sections of terminal ileum tissue are isolated, split in half, and flash frozen for RNA and protein evaluation of tight junctions and claudins, critical mediators of gut barrier integrity, as well as inflammatory cytokine levels including but not limited to TNF-α, IL-17, IFNγ and IL-1β. RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR, and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the aforementioned proteins of interest (Li et al., 2016).
  • Micro-computed tomographic (μCT) scanning: To analyze amount of alveolar bone loss following ligature induced periodontal disease, jaw bones are imaged by μCT scanning at 16-μm resolution, and volumetric data are converted to DICOM format and imported Imaging software to generate 3D and multiplanar reconstructed images. To quantify the amount of bone loss induced by experimental periodontal disease, the imaged volume is oriented with the nasal cavity floor parallel to the horizontal plane and the midpalatal suture parallel to the midsagittal plane. Then the volume is angled such that the long axis of the distal root of the first molar and the mesial root of the second molar are vertical to the horizontal plane. Then the distance between the cementoenamel junction and the alveolar bone crest are measured at the center of D1 and M2. To quantitatively assess changes in the width of the buccal alveolar outline on axial slices, the imaged volume is oriented such that the floor of the nasal cavity is parallel to the horizontal plane and the midpalatal suture was parallel to the midsagittal plane. Then the shortest distance from the buccal surface of the root to the buccal outline of the alveolar ridge is measured for the mesial and distal roots of the first and second molars at the level of the hard palate.
  • Histopathology: Bones are decalcified in for 4 to 6 days or in 14.5% EDTA (pH 7.2) for 4 weeks. Samples are then embedded in paraffin, and 5-μm-thick coronal sections at the interproximal area between the first and second maxillary molars are made. Thus each section includes a complete cross section through the entire maxilla, which allows a side-by-side comparison of the bone, teeth, and soft tissues from the ligature (right) and nonligature (left) sites. To quantify the area of osteonecrosis and periosteal thickness, hematoxylin, and eosin (H&E)-stained slides are digitally scanned using the Aperio XT automated slide scanner and the Aperio ImageScope Version 10 software (Aperio Technologies, Inc., Vista, Calif., USA). Areas of osteonecrosis, defined as loss of more than five contiguous osteocytes with confluent areas of empty lacunae, are marked and the total area are calculated by the ImageScope software. The ruler tool in ImageScope is used to measure the greatest area of buccal periosteal thickness on both the ligature and nonligature sides. Numbers of empty and total osteocytic lacunae are counted manually on the digital whole-slide image over a 1-mm-long and 0.25-mm-wide area of bone (length and width measured with the ImageScope ruler tool) at the buccal alveolus adjacent to the D1 root.
  • Protein and cytokine analysis of periodontal tissue: Whole buccal and palatal tissues of maxillary molars are collected. RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR as previously described (Glowackia et al., 2013), and protein is extracted and evaluated by ELISA and/or western blot as previously described for the cytokines and proteins of interest including but not limited to IL-10, TGF-β, TNF-α, cytotoxic T lymphocyte antigen 4 (CTLA-4), and RANKL.
  • H. pylori-Associated Gastritis
  • Our lead candidate DMAs are evaluated for their therapeutic efficacy in a mouse model of Helicobacter pylori-associated gastritis. All mice are group housed with 5 mice per cage in individually ventilated cages (IVCs) specifically designed for germ free husbandry. Adult male and female C57Bl/6J mice are randomly allocated to experimental groups and allowed to acclimate for two weeks. After an acclimation period, baseline samples of feces and blood are collected, and baseline measures of body mass are recorded. On Day 0, animals are infected three times over a 5-day period with a 0.1 ml volume containing 108 H. pylori (Sydney strain. SS1) organisms. Two weeks following infection, mice are treated by hi-daily oral gavage of water (negative control), triple antibiotic therapy of omeprazole, metronidazole, and clarithromycin (positive control), DMA #1, DMA #2, DMA #3, DMA #4, or DMA #5 for a period of 2-weeks. Fecal samples are collected weekly for metagenoimc analysis. All animals are sacrificed 36 hours after the cessation of treatment for assessment of bacterial colonization by rapid qPCR and histology.
  • Histology. One-half of each stomach is placed into 10% buffered formalin and processed in paraffin, and 4-μm sections will be stained with a modified Steiner silver stain. Colonization is assessed on a five-point scale: 0, no bacteria; 1, less than ⅓ of crypts colonized with 1 to 10 bacteria; 2, ⅓ to ⅔ of crypts colonized with 10 to 20 bacteria; 3, ⅔ of the crypts colonized with >20 bacteria; and 4, all crypts colonized with >20 bacteria as previously described (
  • Confirmation of H. pylori eradication by quantitative PCR: A longitudinal strip of gastric tissue from the greater curvature is digested with proteinase K at 55 C overnight, followed by DNA extraction. H. pylori colonization levels in gastric tissue is quantified by PCR with strain specific primers as previously described (Velduyzen van Zanten et al., 2003). Any sample detecting <10 copies of the H. pylori genome is considered negative for H. pylori colonization.
  • Inflammatory cytokine quantification by qRTPCR: A longitudinal strip of gastric tissue from the greater curvature is isolated, and RNA is extracted and analyzed by qRT-PCR as previously described (Velduyzen van Zanten et al., 2003) to quantify inflammatory cytokines in the stomach tissue including but not limited to TNF-α, IL-1β, and IFNγ.
  • Metagenomic analysis of fecal pellets: DNA from the fecal pellets are extracted using the ZymoBIOMICS DNA isolation kit (Zymo Reserch, CA) and the concentration are estimated using the Qubit 2.0 dsDNA high sensitivity assay (Invitrogen, CA). DNA libraries are prepared using the Illumina Nextera Flex library kit and an equimolar volume of each library will be pooled and sequenced on an Illumina NovaSeq S1 instrument (NovaSeq Control Software v1.7.5) on a 2×150 bp paired end run. Raw sequencing reads are processed using Solexa QA v3.1.7.1 (Cox et al., 2010) for trimming and removing of adaptors using a Phred score >20 and a minimum fragment size of 50 bp. Mouse DNA removal from the metagenomes is performed by mapping reads to the mouse reference genome GRCm38p6 using Bowtie2 v 2.4.2, with default parameters (Langmead and Salzberg, 2012).
  • Taxonomic classification of the short-read metagenomes are based on marker genes identified using MetaPh1An2 (Segata et al., 2012), and organism abundances are calculated at different classification levels (species, genus, family) Functional profiling of microbial community members is performed using HUMAnN2 (Franzosa et al., 2018) and reference pathways databases including UniRef90 and ChocoPh1An. The abundance of metabolic pathways in the gut microbiome are estimated using the HUMAnN2 output.
    • Example 10: DMAs Identified with Increased Short Chain Fatty Acids Production
  • Individual strains and DMAs shown in Table 7, Table A and Table B were screened for production of butyrate and propionate. For example, SBI4825 (Clostridium sp.) exhibited high levels of butyrate, and similar levels of butyrate were observed in DMAs 1, 2, and 3 (FIG. 17A). SBI4833 exhibited high levels of propionate (FIG. 17B). SBI4833 is present in DMAs 1 and 2, but not DMA 3. These results show that particular DMAs are capable of increased production of short chain fatty acids.
  • TABLE A
    Exemplary Strains in DMAs Selected for in vitro
    Characterization
    Isolate Kingdom Genus Species
    Strian
    2* Bacteria Lactobacillus brevis
    Strain 8 Fungi Hanseniaspora occidentalis
    Strain
    9* Bacteria Lactobacillus casei
    Strain
    10 Bacteria Weisella cibaria
    Strain
    11 Fungi Pichia kudriavzevii
    Strain
    7 Bacteria Pediococcus pentosaceus
    Strain
    1 Bacteria Bacillus velezensis
    Strain
    12 Bacteria Clostridioides mangenotii
    Strain 13 Bacteria Clostridium sp.
    Strain 14 Bacteria Exiguobacterium sp.
    Strain 15 Bacteria Paenibacillus polymyxa
    Strain
    16 Fungi Meyerozyma caribbica
    Strain 17* Bacteria Lactobacillus pentosus
    Strain
    18 Bacteria Enterococcus gilvus
    Strain
    6* Fungi Hanseniaspora uvarum
    Strain
    3* Bacteria Lactobacillus buchneri
    Strain
    5* Bacteria Lactococcus lactis
    Strain
    4 Bacteria Lactobacillus harbinensis
    *Indicates species with Qualified Presumption of Safety (QPS) Status
  • TABLE B
    Defined Microbial Assemblage
    DMA1 DMA2 DMA3 DMA4 DMA5 DMA6 DMA7 DMA8 DMA9 DMA10 DMA11 DMA12
    Anaerobe Strain 13 x x x
    Strain 12 x x
    Lactic Strain 10 x x x x
    Acid Strain 2* x x x x x x
    Bacteria Srain 3t* x x x x
    Strain 7* x x x
    Strain 5* x x
    Strain 4 x x
    Strain 18 x
    Strain 9* x
    Bacteria Strain 15 x x
    (Other) Strain 1* x x x
    Strain 14 x
    Fungi Strain 16 x x x x
    Strain 11 x
    Strain 8 x
    Strain 6* x x
    *Indicates species with Qualified Presumption of Safety (QPS) Status
    • Example 11: DMA-12 Exhibits Reduced TNFα Secretion
  • Individual strains and DMAs shown in Table 7 were screened for the ability to reduce secretion of cytokines when co-cultured with macrophages.
  • U937 monocyte cells were cultivated in suspension in RPMI medium containing 10% FBS, 1 mM Glutamine, 12.5 mM HEPES, 1× Anti-Anti (Gibco) at 37° C. 5% CO2. Monocytes were differentiated into macrophage-like cells by the addition of 20 nM phorbol 12-myristate 13-acetate (PMA) for 72 hrs, at which the media was replaced with fresh medium without PMA, leaving adherent, differentiated macrophage-like cells. Experimentation proceeded 24 hrs after medium replacement.
  • To examine the effect of microbial supernatants on cytokine production of macrophages, bacteria and yeast were cultivated for 24-48 hours under nutrient, temperature, and oxygen conditions favorable for robust growth of each strain. Microbes were pelleted and culture supernatants were filter sterilized. Supernatants and cultivation medium controls were added at 10% to U937 cultures and co-incubated for 24 hours to induce cytokine production. U937 culture supernatants were removed and analyzed for lysis (Cytotox 96, Promega) and IL-10 and TNFα release by ELISA (PromoCell) per the manufacturers' protocols. Results as shown in Table 7 were compared to media and agonist (LPS) controls.
  • To examine the effect of whole microbes on cytokine production of macrophages, microbes were inoculated onto macrophage-like cells at an 1:1 bacterial:macrophage ratio and co-incubated for 8 hrs at 37° C. 5% CO2. Supernatants from the cocultures were removed and analyzed for lysis (Cytotox 96, Promega) and IL-10, IL-6, IL-1b and TNFα release by ELISA (Thermo Fisher) per the manufacturers' protocols. Results as shown in Table 7 were compared to media and agonist (LPS) controls. Microbial titers were measured at the beginning and end of the experiment by dilution plating.
  • As shown in FIG. 18 , for Tumor Necrosis Factor Alpha (TNFα), a proinflammoatry cytokine associated with rheumatoid arthritis, unlike most DMAs, whole microbes of DMA12 stimulated less TNFα secretion than its constituent microbes when incubated with macrophages. These results show that particular DMAs can be effective to reduce proinflammatory cytokine secretion by macrophages.
    • Example 12: Reductions in IL-8 in DMA2 and DMA6 vs. Constituent Microbes
  • Intestinal epithelial cells are the first cells to encounter microbes and contribute to the immune response. Epithelial cells can secrete Interleukin 8 (IL-8) and CXCL-1, two chemokines responsible for neutrophil recruitment to sites of inflammation. To investigate the ability of DMAs and strains to reduce the level of IL-8 in intestinal epithelial cells, DMAs shown in Table 7 were screened for stimulation of secretion of IL-8 and CXCL-1, when cultured with human colorectal adenocarcinoma epithelial cells (HT29 cells).
  • HT29 cells were cultivated in DMEM medium containing 10%1 mM Glutamine, 1× Anti-Anti(Gibco) at 37° C. 5% CO2. Microbes were inoculated onto epithelial cells at a 1:1 bacterial:macrophage ratio and co-incubated for 16 hrs at 37° C. 5% CO2. Supernatants from the cocultures were removed and analyzed for lysis (Cytotox 96, Promega) and IL-8 and CXCL-1 release by ELISA (Thermo Fisher) per the manufacturers' protocols. Results were compared to media and agonist (LPS) controls. Microbial titers were measured at the beginning and end of the experiment by dilution plating.
  • The robust IL-8 response induced by SBI4825 was ameliorated in DMA2 by other microbes present, but not in DMA1 (FIG. 19 ). The robust IL-8 response induced by SBI4877 was ameliorated in DMA6 by other microbes present, but not in DMA5 (FIG. 20 ). These results show that particular DMAs can be effective to reduce proinflammatory cytokine secreation by intestinal epithelial cells.
    • Example 13: Synergy for GABA Production in DMA5 and DMA6
  • In addition to being beneficial for neurological, vascular, and musculoskeletal functioning neurotransmitters can directly affect immune cells. DMAs shown in Table 7 were screened for secretion of GABA, a neurotransmitter derived from glutamate that has been shown to inhibit T cell responses and reduce proinflammatory cytokine secretion (FIG. 21 ).
  • To examine the ability of individual strains and DMAs to produce GABA, single microbial strains were grown for 24-48 hrs to achieve a high OD in brain heart infusion (BHI) or tryptic soy broth (TSB) for bacteria and potato dextrose broth (PDB) for yeast. Cultures were OD600 normalized to achieve a uniform density and inoculated (10% final volume) into TSB containing 0.1% added tryptophan and grown for 48 hrs. Culture supernatants were removed and analyzed by ELISA for GABA production (LS Bio) following the manufacturers' protocols.
  • As shown in FIG. 21 , increased levels of GABA were detected in DMA5 and DMA6. These results show that particular DMAs are capable of producing GABA neurotransmitter.
    • Example 14: Enhanced Serotonin Production in DMA3, DMA5, DMA6
  • DMAs shown in Table 7 were screened for secretion of serotonin, a neurotransmitter that reduces proinflammatory cytokine secretion by macrophages while modulating immune cell recruitment.
  • To examine the ability of individual strains and DMAs to produce serotonins, single microbial strains were grown for 24-48 hrs to achieve a high OD in brain heart infusion (BHI) or tryptic soy broth (TSB) for bacteria and potato dextrose broth (PDB) for yeast. Cultures were OD600 normalized to achieve a uniform density and inoculated (10% final volume) into TSB containing 0.1% added tryptophan and grown for 48 hrs. Culture supernatants were removed and analyzed by ELISA for Serotonin (ENZO) following the manufacturers' protocols.
  • As shown in FIG. 22 , increased levels of serotonin were detected in DMA3, DMA5 and DMA6. These results show that particular DMAs are capable of producing serotonin neurotransmitter.
    • Example 15: Production of Serotonin by DMAs In Vitro
  • To confirm the ability of DMAs to produce serotonin, DMAs were cultured in BHI medium and the amount of serotonin excreted in the culture medium was measured by ELISA. DMAs DMA005 (DMA5), DMA006 (DMA6), DMA010 (DMA10), and DMA012 (DMA12) were capable of producing serotonin. DMA006 (DMA6) produced the largest amount of serotonin (FIG. 23 ). These results confirm that DMAs are capable of producing serotonin.
  • Individual strains of the DMAs were also cultured and the amount of serotonin was measured and compared to the serotonin of the strains cultured as the DMA (FIG. 24 ). The amount of serotonin produced by the individual strains comprising DMA005 (DMA5), DMA006 (DMA6), DMA010 (DMA10) and DMA012 (DMA12) was similar to the total sum of serotonin produced by the corresponding DMA. These results indicate that there is additivity of the serotonin produced by the individual strains when cultured as a DMA.
  • Other metabolites were also measured for possible production by the DMAs in vitro, including acetate, butyrate, propionate, and GABA (FIG. 25 ).
    • Example 16: DMA Effects on Cytokine Production
  • In order to confirm the ability of DMAs to modify cytokine production of immune cells, such as macrophages, DMAs were added to macrophages a a ratio of 4:1 (four microbes per one macrophage like cell and coincubated at 37° C., 5% CO2 for eight hours, and cytokine production, such as interleukin (IL)-1β, IL-10, IL-6 and tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNFα) was measured by ELISA (FIG. 26 ). Macrophages cultured with DMA005 (DMA5) or DMA006 (DMA6) exhibited a robust production of IL-10, IL-6 and TNFα.
  • These results confirm that DMAs can modify cytokine production of immune cells, such as macrophages.
    • Example 17: Rapid Screening of DMAs in Disease Model of Delayed Type Hypersensitivity (DTH)
  • For rapid screening of DMAs in animals for anti-inflammatory activity, a delayed type hypersensitivity (DTH) model of inflammation was employed. Briefly, 8-week old male mice were sensitized on Day-0 by subcutaneous injection of 1 mg/ml methylated bovine serum albumin (mBSA) and 1 mg/ml complete Freund's adjuvant (CFA). On Day-8, mice received a second challenge injection of 100 μg of BSA in 20 μL of PBS in the plantar surface of the left hind paw. The contra-lateral paw was injected with the same volume of saline alone. The relative swelling was calculated on Day-9 (FIG. 27 ). On days 0-8, DMAs were administered by oral gavage twice daily. Dexamethasone was administered once daily as a positive control for reduction of paw swelling/inflammation. Paw swelling measurements were taken nine days after initial sensitization with mBSA/CFA.
  • DMAs (DMA005, DMA006, DMA010, and DMA012) were selected for screening of anti-inflammatory effects in the DTH model based on their ability to produce the immunomodulatory effectors serotonin, GABA, and acetate in vitro (FIGS. 25, 26, and 27 ), as well as their ability to modulate cytokine production by macrophages in vitro (production of IL-10, TNFα, IL-6, and/or IL-1β; FIG. 28 ). DMA006 (DMA6) resulted in a significant reduction in paw swelling compared to vehicle control, while DMA005 (DMA5), DMA010 (DMA10) and DMA012 (DMA12) resulted in trends of reduced swelling (FIG. 28 ).
  • These results show that DMAs that produce the anti-inflammatory effector molecules serotonin, GABA, and acetate and that can modulate cytokine production by macrophages in vitro are able to ameliorate the inflammatory response in an animal model of delayed type hypersensitivity. These results also indicate that the effects on the inflammatory response are dependent on the composition of the DMAs and show that the DMA production of serotonin in vitro correlates with reduction of inflammation in vivo.
    • Example 18: Collagen-Induced Arthritis Mouse Model of Rheumatoid Arthritis for Testing DMAs
  • In order to test and confirm DMAs effects for treatment of Rheumatoid Arthritis (RA), a mouse model of RA is used where collagen is administered to mice to induce arthritis (FIG. 29 ). Collagen and complete Freund's adjuvant (CFA) are injected into mouse paws on day zero, and mice are administered DMAs twice daily, seven days a week on day 14 by oral gavage for 4 weeks. Paws of mice are monitored for swelling and sample tissue (including blood samples) are collected. Mice administered DMAs show a significant reduction in paw swelling and RA symptoms as well as reduction in pro-inflammatory cytokine production.
  • These results confirm that DMAs are capable of reducing disease symptoms associated with RA.
  • While the invention has been particularly shown and described with reference to a preferred embodiment and various alternate embodiments, it will be understood by persons skilled in the relevant art that various changes in form and details can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.
  • All references, issued patents and patent applications cited within the body of the instant specification are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety, for all purposes.
    • REFERENCES CITED
    • Aghaloo, T. L., Kang, B., Sung, E. C., Shoff, M., Ronconi, M., Gotcher, J. E., Bezouglaia, O., Dry, S. M., & Tetradis, S. (2011). Periodontal disease and bisphosphonates induce osteonecrosis of the jaws in the rat. Journal of bone and mineral research: the official journal of the American Society for Bone and Mineral Research, 26(8), 1871-1882. https://doi.org/10.1002/jbmr.379
    • Agus, A., Planchais, J., & Sokol, H. (2018). Gut Microbiota Regulation of Tryptophan Metabolism in Health and Disease. Cell host & microbe, 23(6), 716-724. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chom.2018.05.003
    • Adluri, R. K., Singh, A. V., Skoyles, J., Robins, A Parton, J., Baker, M., & Mitchell, I. M. (2010). The effect of fenoldopam and dopexamine on cytokine and endotoxin release following on-pump coronary artery bypass grafting: a prospective randomized double-blind trial. The heart surgery forum, 13(6), E353-E361. https://doi.org/10.1532/HSF98.20101073
    • Altschul, S. F., Gish, W., Miller, W., Myers, E. W., & Lipman, D. J. (1990). Basic local alignment search tool. Journal of molecular biology, 215(3), 403-410. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0022-2836(05)80360-2
    • An, J., Seok, H., & Ha, E. M. (2021). GABA-producing Lactobacillus plantarum inhibits metastatic properties and induces apoptosis of 5-FU-resistant colorectal cancer cells via GABAB receptor signaling. Journal of microbiology (Seoul, Korea), 59(2), 202-216. https://doi.org/10.1007/s12275-021-0562-5
      Apweiler, R., Bairoch, A., Wu, C. H., Barker, W. C., Boeckmann, B., Ferro, S., Gasteiger, E., Huang, H., Lopez, R., Magrane, M., Martin, M. J., Natale, D. A., O'Donovan, C., Redaschi, N., & Yeh, L. S. (2004). UniProt: the Universal Protein knowledgebase. Nucleic acids research, 32(Database issue), D115-D119. https://doi.org/10.1093/nar/gkh131
    • Bagga, D., Wang, L., Farias-Eisner, R., Glaspy, J. A., & Reddy, S. T. (2003). Differential effects of prostaglandin derived from omega-6 and omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids on COX-2 expression and IL-6 secretion. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America, 100(4), 1751-1756. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.0334211100
    • Bansal, T., Alaniz, R. C., Wood, T. K., & Jayaraman, A. (2010). The bacterial signal indole increases epithelial-cell tight-junction resistance and attenuates indicators of inflammation. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America, 107(1), 228-233. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.0906112107
    • Caffaratti, C., Plazy, C., Mery, G., Tidjani, A. R., Fiorini, F., Thiroux, S., Toussaint, B., Hannani, D., & Le Gouellec, A. (2021). What We Know So Far about the Metabolite-Mediated Microbiota-Intestinal Immunity Dialogue and How to Hear the Sound of This Crosstalk. Metabolites, 11(6), 406. https://doi.org/10.3390/metabo11060406
    • Cario E. (2008). Barrier-protective function of intestinal epithelial Toll-like receptor 2. Mucosal immunology, 1 Suppl 1, S62-S66. https://doi.org/10.1038/mi.2008.47
    • Catrina, A. I., Deane, K. D., & Scher, J. U. (2016). Gene, environment, microbiome and mucosal immune tolerance in rheumatoid arthritis. Rheumatology (Oxford, England), 55(3), 391-402. https://doi.org/10.1093/rheumatology/keu469
    • Chassaing, B., Ley, R. E., & Gewirtz, A. T. (2014). Intestinal epithelial cell toll-like receptor 5 regulates the intestinal microbiota to prevent low-grade inflammation and metabolic syndrome in mice. Gastroenterology, 147(6), 1363-77.e17. https://doi.org/10.1053/j.gastro.2014.08.033
    • Costa, O. Y. A., Raaijmakers, J. M., & Kuramae, E. E. (2018). Microbial extracellular polymeric substances: Ecological function and impact on soil aggregation. Frontiers in Microbiology, 9. https://doi.org/10.3389/fmicb.2018.01636
    • Cox, M. P., Peterson, D. A. & Biggs, P. J. SolexaQA: At-a-glance quality assessment of Illumina second-generation sequencing data. BMC Bioinformatics 11, 485 (2010).
    • Feres, M., Teles, F., Teles, R., Figueiredo, L. C., & Faveri, M. (2016). The subgingival periodontal microbiota of the aging mouth. Periodontology 2000, 72(1), 30-53. https://doi.org/10.1111/prd.12136
    • Fiorucci, S., Biagioli, M., Zampella, A., & Distrutti, E. (2018). Bile Acids Activated Receptors Regulate Innate Immunity. Frontiers in immunology, 9, 1853. https://doi.org/10.3389/fimmu.2018.01853
    • Franzosa, E. A., McIver, L. J., Rahnavard, G., Thompson, L. R., Schirmer, M., Weingart, G., Lipson, K. S., Knight, R., Caporaso, J. G., Segata, N., & Huttenhower, C. (2018). Species-level functional profiling of metagenomes and metatranscriptomes. Nature methods, 15(11), 962-968. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41592-018-0176-y
    • Gao, J., Xu, K., Liu, H., Liu, G., Bai, M., Peng, C., Li, T., & Yin, Y. (2018). Impact of the Gut Microbiota on Intestinal Immunity Mediated by Tryptophan Metabolism. Frontiers in cellular and infection microbiology, 8, 13. https://doi.org/10.3389/fcimb.2018.00013
    • Gatej, S. M., Marino, V., Bright, R., Fitzsimmons, T. R., Gully, N., Zilm, P., Gibson, R. J., Edwards, S., & Bartold, P. M. (2018). Probiotic Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG prevents alveolar bone loss in a mouse model of experimental periodontitis. Journal of clinical periodontology, 45(2), 204-212. https://doi.org/10.1111/jcpe.12838
    • Giri, S. S., Sen, S. S., Jun, J. W., Sukumaran, V., & Park, S. C. (2017). Role of Bacillus licheniformis VS16-Derived Biosurfactant in Mediating Immune Responses in Carp Rohu and its Application to the Food Industry. Frontiers in microbiology, 8, 514. https://doi.org/10.3389/fmicb.2017.00514
    • Glowacki, A. J., Yoshizawa, S., Jhunjhunwala, S., Vieira, A. E., Garlet, G. P., Sfeir, C., & Little, S. R. (2013). Prevention of inflammation-mediated bone loss in murine and canine periodontal disease via recruitment of regulatory lymphocytes. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America, 110(46), 18525-18530. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.1302829110
    • Grootaert, C., Boon, N., Zeka, F., Vanhoecke, B., Bracke, M., Verstraete, W., & Van de Wiele, T. (2011). Adherence and viability of intestinal bacteria to differentiated Caco-2 cells quantified by flow cytometry. Journal of microbiological methods, 86(1), 33-41. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.mimet 2011.03.011
    • Han, S., Lu, Y., Xie, J., Fei, Y., Zheng, G., Wang, Z., Liu, J., Lv, L., Ling, Z., Berglund, B., Yao, M., & Li, L. (2021). Probiotic Gastrointestinal Transit and Colonization After Oral Administration: A Long Journey. Frontiers in cellular and infection microbiology, 11, 609722. https://doi.org/10.3389/fcimb.2021.609722
    • Heinken, A., Ravcheev, D. A., Baldini, F., Heirendt, L., Fleming, R. M. T., &amp; Thiele, I. (2019). Systematic assessment of secondary bile acid metabolism in gut microbes reveals distinct metabolic capabilities in inflammatory bowel disease. Microbiome, 7(1). https://doi.org/10.1186/s40168-019-0689-3
    • Higgins, S. C., Lavelle, E. C., McCann, C., Keogh, B., McNeela, E., Byrne, P., O'Gorman, B., Jarnicki, A., McGuirk, P., & Mills, K. H. (2003). Toll-like receptor 4-mediated innate IL-10 activates antigen-specific regulatory T cells and confers resistance to Bordetella pertussis by inhibiting inflammatory pathology. Journal of immunology (Baltimore, Md.: 1950), 171(6), 3119-3127. https://doi.org/10.4049/jimmunol.171.6.3119
    • Holers, V. M., Demoruelle, M. K., Kuhn, K. A., Buckner, J. H., Robinson, W. H., Okamoto, Y., Norris, J. M., & Deane, K. D. (2018). Rheumatoid arthritis and the mucosal origins hypothesis: protection turns to destruction. Nature reviews. Rheumatology, 14(9), 542-557. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41584-018-0070-0
    • Hsieh, S. A., & Allen, P. M. (2020) Immunomodulatory Roles of Polysaccharide Capsules in the Intestine. Frontiers in immunology, 11, 690. https://doi.org/10.3389/fimmu.2020.00690
    • Jang, S., Uematsu, S., Akira, S., & Salgame, P. (2004). IL-6 and IL-10 induction from dendritic cells in response to Mycobacterium tuberculosis is predominantly dependent on TLR2-mediated recognition. Journal of immunology (Baltimore, Md.: 1950), 173(5), 3392-3397. https://doi.org/10.4049/jimmunol.173.5.3392
    • Jenab, A., Roghanian, R., & Emtiazi, G. (2020). Bacterial Natural Compounds with Anti-Inflammatory and Immunomodulatory Properties (Mini Review). Drug design, development and therapy, 14, 3787-3801. https://doi.org/10.2147/DDDT.S261283
    • Jhun, J., Min, H. K., Ryu, J., Lee, S. Y., Ryu, J. G., Choi, J. W., Na, H. S., Lee, S. Y., Jung, Y., Park, S. J., Park, M. S., Kwon, B., Ji, G. E., Cho, M. L., & Park, S. H. (2020). Lactobacillus sakei suppresses collagen-induced arthritis and modulates the differentiation of T helper 17 cells and regulatory B cells. Journal of translational medicine, 18(1), 317. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12967-020-02477-8
    • Jin, H., Jeong, Y., Yoo, S H. et al. Isolation and characterization of high exopolysaccharide-producing Weissella confusa VP30 from young children's feces. Microb Cell Fact 18, 110 (2019). https://doi.org/10.1186/s12934-019-1158-1
    • Jin, X. T., Galvan, A., Wichmann, T., & Smith, Y. (2011). Localization and Function of GABA Transporters GAT-1 and GAT-3 in the Basal Ganglia. Frontiers in systems neuroscience 5, 63. https://doi.org/10.3389/fnsys.2011.00063
    • Kang, J. X., & Weylandt, K. H. (2008). Modulation of inflammatory cytokines by omega-3 fatty acids. Sub-cellular biochemistry, 49, 133-143. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4020-8831-5_5
    • Kinane, D. F., Stathopoulou, P. G., & Papapanou, P. N. (2017). Periodontal diseases. Nature reviews. Disease primers, 3, 17038. https://doi.org/10.1038/nrdp.2017.38
    • Kobayashi, R., Kobayashi, T., Sakai, F., Hosoya, T., Yamamoto, M., & Kurita-Ochiai, T. (2017). Oral administration of Lactobacillus gasseri SBT2055 is effective in preventing Porphyromonas gingivalis-accelerated periodontal disease. Scientific reports, 7(1), 545. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-017-00623-9
    • Kolmogorov Mikhail, Yuan Jeffrey, Lin Yu and Pevzner Pavel, Assembly of Long Error-Prone Reads Using Repeat Graphs. Nature Biotechnology, 2019
    • Langmead, B., & Salzberg, S. L. (2012). Fast gapped-read alignment with Bowtie 2. Nature methods, 9(4), 357-359. https://doi.org/10.1038/nmeth.1923
    • Lebeer S, Claes I, Tytgat H L, Verhoeven T L, Marien E, von Ossowski I, Reunanen J, Palva A, Vos W M, Keersmaecker S C, Vanderleyden J. Functional analysis of Lactobacillus rhamnosus GG pili in relation to adhesion and immunomodulatory interactions with intestinal epithelial cells. Appl Environ Microbiol. 2012 January; 78(1):185-93. doi: 10.1128/AEM.06192-11. Epub 2011 Oct. 21. PMID: 22020518; PMCID: PMC3255643.
    • Li, J. Y., Chassaing, B., Tyagi, A. M., Vaccaro, C., Luo, T., Adams, J., Darby, T. M., Weitzmann, M. N., Mulle, J. G., Gewirtz, A. T., Jones, R. M., & Pacifici, R. (2016). Sex steroid deficiency-associated bone loss is microbiota dependent and prevented by probiotics. The Journal of clinical investigation, 126(6), 2049-2063. https://doi.org/10.1172/JCI86062
    • Liu, B., Faller, L. L., Klitgord, N., Mazumdar, V., Ghodsi, M., Sommer, D. D., Gibbons, T. R., Treangen, T. J., Chang, Y. C., Li, S., Stine, 0. C., Flasturk, H., Kasif, S., Segre, D., Pop, M., &. Amar, S. (2012). Deep sequencing of the oral microbiome reveals signatures of periodontal disease. PloS one, 7(6), e37919. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0037919
    • Macfarlane, S., & Macfarlane, G. T. (2003). Regulation of short-chain fatty acid production. The Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, 62(1), 67-72. https://doi.org/10.1079/PNS2002207
    • Maeda, Y., Kurakawa, T., Umemoto, E., Motooka, D., Ito, Y., Gotoh, K., Hirota, K., Matsushita, M., Furuta, Y., Narazaki, M., Sakaguchi, N., Kayama, H., Nakamura, S., Lida, T., Saeki, Y., Kumanogoh, A., Sakaguchi, S., & Takeda, K. (2016). Dysbiosis Contributes to Arthritis Development via Activation of Autoreactive T Cells in the Intestine. Arthritis & rheumatology (Hoboken, N.J.), 68(11), 2646-2661. https://doi.org/10.1002/art.39783
    • Marietta, E. V., Murray, J. A., Luckey, D. H., Jeraldo, P. R., Lamba, A., Patel, R., Luthra, H. S., Mangalam, A., & Taneja, V. (2016). Suppression of Inflammatory Arthritis by Human Gut-Derived Prevotella histicola in Humanized Mice. Arthritis & rheumatology (Hoboken, N.J.), 68(12), 2878-2888. https://doi.org/10.1002/art.39785
    • Marinelli, L., Martin-Gallausiaux, C., Bourhis, J M. et al. Identification of the novel role of butyrate as AhR ligand in human intestinal epithelial cells. Sci Rep 9, 643 (2019). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-018-37019-2
    • Monteagudo-Mera A, Rastall R A, Gibson G R, Charalampopoulos D, Chatzifragkou A. Adhesion mechanisms mediated by probiotics and prebiotics and their potential impact on human health. Appl Microbiol Biotechnol. 2019 August; 103(16):6463-6472. doi: 10.1007/s00253-019-09978-7. Epub 2019 Jul. 2. PMID: 31267231; PMCID: PMC6667406.
    • Morikawa, M., Hirata, Y., & Imanaka, T. (2000). A study on the structure-function relationship of lipopeptide biosurfactants. Biochimica et biophysica acta, 1488(3), 211-218. https://doi.org/10.1016/s1388-1981(00)00124-4
    • Mulligan, C. (1984). The use of biological compounds to enhance the de-watering of peat. Department of Chemical Engineering. McGill University.
    • Nguyen, B. N., Chavez-Arroyo, A., Cheng, M. I., Krasilnikov, M., Louie, A., & Portnoy, D. A. (2020). TLR2 and endosomal TLR-mediated secretion of IL-10 and immune suppression in response to phagosome-confined Listeria monocytogenes. PLoS pathogens, 16(7), e1008622. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.ppat.1008622
    • Ni, Z., Min, Y., Han, C. et al. TGR5-HNF4α axis contributes to bile acid-induced gastric intestinal metaplasia markers expression. Cell Death Discov. 6, 56 (2020). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41420-020-0290-3
    • Parks, D. H., Imelfort, M., Skennerton, C. T., Hugenholtz, P. & Tyson, G. W. CheckM: assessing the quality of microbial genomes recovered from isolates, single cells, and metagenomes. Genome Res 25, 1043-1055 (2015).
    • Paynich, M. L., Jones-Burrage, S. E., & Knight, K. L. (2017). Exopolysaccharide from Bacillus subtilis Induces Anti-Inflammatory M2 Macrophages That Prevent T Cell-Mediated Disease. Journal of immunology (Baltimore, Md.: 1950), 198(7), 2689-2698. https://doi.org/10.4049/jimmunol.1601641
    • Peng, Y., Leung, H. C. M., Yiu, S. M. & Chin, F. Y. L. IDBA-UD: a de novo assembler for single-cell and metagenomic sequencing data with highly uneven depth. Bioinformatics 28, 1420-1428 (2012).
    • Pérez-Chaparro, P. J., Gonsalves, C., Figueiredo, L. C., Faveri, M., Lobao, E., Tamashiro, N., Duarte, P., & Feres, M. (2014). Newly identified pathogens associated with periodontitis: a systematic review. Journal of dental research, 93(9), 846-858. https://doi.org/10.1177/0022034514542468
    • Pinoli, M., Marino, F., & Cosentino, M. (2017). Dopaminergic Regulation of Innate Immunity: a Review. Journal of neuroimmune pharmacology: the official journal of the Society on NeuroImmune Pharmacology, 12(4), 602-623. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11481-017-9749-2
    • Postler, T. S., & Ghosh, S. (2017). Understanding the Holobiont: How Microbial Metabolites Affect Human Health and Shape the Immune System. Cell metabolism, 26(1), 110-130. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cmet.2017.05.008
    • Rao, S. P., Sancho, J., Campos-Rivera, J., Boutin, P. M., Severy, P. B., Weeden, T., Shankara, S., Roberts, B. L., & Kaplan, J. M. (2012). Human peripheral blood mononuclear cells exhibit heterogeneous CD52 expression levels and show differential sensitivity to alemtuzumab mediated cytolysis. PloS one, 7(6), e39416. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0039416
    • Reinhoud, N. J., Brouwer, H. J., van Heerwaarden, L. M., & Korte-Bouws, G. A. (2013). Analysis of glutamate, GABA, noradrenaline, dopamine, serotonin, and metabolites using microbore UHPLC with electrochemical detection. ACS chemical neuroscience, 4(5), 888-894. https://doi.org/10.1021/cn400044s
    • Rühmann, B, Schmid, J., & Sieber, V. (2015). Methods to identify the unexplored diversity of microbial exopolysaccharides. Frontiers in microbiology, 6, 565. https://doi.org/10.3389/fmicb.2015.00565
    • Sandrini, S., Aldriwesh, M., Alruways, M., & Freestone, P. (2015). Microbial endocrinology: host-bacteria communication within the gut microbiome. The Journal of endocrinology, 225(2), R21-R34. https://doi.org/10.1530/JOE-14-0615
    • Saraiva, M., & O'Garra, A. (2010). The regulation of IL-10 production by immune cells. Nature reviews. Immunology, 10(3), 170-181. https://doi.org/10.1038/nri2711
    • Segata, N., Waldron, L., Ballarini, A., Narasimhan, V., Jousson, O., & Huttenhower, C. (2012). Metagenomic microbial community profiling using unique clade-specific marker genes. Nature methods, 9(8), 811-814. https://doi.org/10.1038/nmeth.2066
    • Sethi, S., & Samantaray, U. S. (2021). Isolation and biochemical characterization of indole acetic acid (IAA) produced in Pseudomonas sp. isolated from rhizospheric soil. International Journal for Research in Applied Sciences and Biotechnology, 8(4). https://doi.org/10.31033/ijrasb.8.4.1
    • Scher, J. U., Sczesnak, A., Longman, R. S., Segata, N., Ubeda, C., Bielski, C., Rostron, T., Cerundolo, V., Pamer, E. G., Abramson, S. B., Huttenhower, C., & Littman, D. R. (2013). Expansion of intestinal Prevotella copri correlates with enhanced susceptibility to arthritis. eLife, 2, e01202. https://doi.org/10.7554/eLife.01202
    • Scortichini, S., Boarelli, M. C., Silvi, S., & Fiorini, D. (2020). Development and validation of a GC-FID method for the analysis of short chain fatty acids in rat and human faeces and in fermentation fluids. Journal of chromatography. B, Analytical technologies in the biomedical and life sciences, 1143, 121972. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jchromb.2020.121972
    • Schott, E. M., Farnsworth, C. W., Grier, A., Lillis, J. A., Soniwala, S., Dadourian, G. H., Bell, R. D., Doolittle, M. L., Villani, D. A., Awad, H., Ketz, J. P., Kamal, F., Ackert-Bicknell, C., Ashton, J. M., Gill, S. R., Mooney, R. A., & Zuscik, M. J. (2018). Targeting the gut microbiome to treat the osteoarthritis of obesity. JCI insight, 3(8), e95997. https://doi.org/10.1172/jci.insight.95997
    • Skelly, A. N., Sato, Y., Kearney, S. et al. Mining the microbiota for microbial and metabolite-based immunotherapies. Nat Rev Immunol 19, 305-323 (2019). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41577-019-0144-5
    • Thevaranjan, N., Puchta, A., Schulz, C., Naidoo, A., Szamosi, J. C., Verschoor, C. P., Loukov, D., Schenck, L. P., Jury, J., Foley, K. P., Schertzer, J. D., Larché, M. J., Davidson, D. J., Verdú, E. F., Surette, M. G., & Bowdish, D. (2017). Age-Associated Microbial Dysbiosis Promotes Intestinal Permeability, Systemic Inflammation, and Macrophage Dysfunction. Cell host & microbe, 21(4), 455-466.e4. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chom.2017.03.002
    • Tyagi, A. M., Yu, M., Darby, T. M., Vaccaro, C., Li, J. Y., Owens, J. A., Hsu, E., Adams, J., Weitzmann, M. N., Jones, R. M., & Pacifici, R. (2018). The Microbial Metabolite Butyrate Stimulates Bone Formation via T Regulatory Cell-Mediated Regulation of WNT10B Expression. Immunity, 49(6), 1116-1131.e7. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.immuni.2018.10.013
    • Vavassori, P., Mencarelli, A., Renga, B., Distrutti, E., & Fiorucci, S. (2009). The bile acid receptor FXR is a modulator of intestinal innate immunity. Journal of immunology (Baltimore, Md.: 1950), 183(10), 6251-6261. https://doi.org/10.4049/jimmunol.0803978
    • Velduyzen van Zanten, S. J., Kolesnikow, T., Leung, V., O'Rourke, J. L., & Lee, A. (2003). Gastric transitional zones, areas where Helicobacter treatment fails: results of a treatment trial using the Sydney strain mouse model. Antimicrobial agents and chemotherapy, 47(7), 2249-2255. https://doi.org/10.1128/AAC.47.7.2249-2255.2003
    • Vijayakumar, P. P., & Muriana, P. M. (2015). A Microplate Growth Inhibition Assay for Screening Bacteriocins against Listeria monocytogenes to Differentiate Their Mode-of-Action. Biomolecules, 5(2), 1178-1194. https://doi.org/10.3390/biom5021178
    • Villageliú, D., & Lyte, M. (2018). Dopamine production in Enterococcus faecium: A microbial endocrinology-based mechanism for the selection of probiotics based on neurochemical-producing potential. PloS one, 13(11), e0207038. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0207038
    • Walsham A D, MacKenzie D A, Cook V, Wemyss-Holden S, Hews C L, Juge N, Schüller S. Lactobacillus reuteri Inhibition of Enteropathogenic Escherichia coli Adherence to Human Intestinal Epithelium. Front Microbiol. 2016 Mar. 1; 7:244. doi: 10.3389/fmicb.2016.00244. PMID: 26973622; PMCID: PMC4771767.
    • Wan, M., Ding, L., Wang, D., Han, J., & Gao, P. (2020). Serotonin: A Potent Immune Cell Modulator in Autoimmune Diseases. Frontiers in immunology, 11, 186. https://doi.org/10.3389/fimmu.2020.00186
    • Wang, Y. D., Chen, W. D., Moore, D. D., & Huang, W. (2008). FXR: a metabolic regulator and cell protector. Cell research, 18(11), 1087-1095. https://doi.org/10.1038/cr.2008.289
    • Wells, P. M., Adebayo, A. S., Bowyer, R., Freidin, M. B., Finckh, A., Strowig, T., Lesker, T. R., Alpizar-Rodriguez, D., Gilbert, B., Kirkham, B., Cope, A. P., Steves, C. J., & Williams, F. (2020). Associations between gut microbiota and genetic risk for rheumatoid arthritis in the absence of disease: a cross-sectional study. The Lancet. Rheumatology, 2(7), e418-e427. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2665-9913(20)30064-3
    • Wilson, T. M., Trent, B., Kuhn, K. A., & Demoruelle, M. K. (2020). Microbial Influences of Mucosal Immunity in Rheumatoid Arthritis. Current rheumatology reports, 22(11), 83. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11926-020-00960-1
    • Yamashita, M., Matsumoto, K., Endo, T., Ukibe, K., Hosoya, T., Matsubara, Y., Nakagawa, H., Sakai, F., & Miyazaki, T. (2017). Preventive Effect of Lactobacillus helveticus SBT2171 on Collagen-Induced Arthritis in Mice. Frontiers in microbiology, 8, 1159. https://doi.org/10.3389/fmicb.2017.01159
    • Yamazaki, M., Matsuoka, T., Yasui, K., Komiyama, A., & Akabane, T. (1989). Dopamine inhibition of superoxide anion production by polymorphonuclear leukocytes. The Journal of allergy and clinical immunology, 83(5), 967-972. https://doi.org/10.1016/0091-6749(89)90113-9
    • Yan, Y., Jiang, W., Liu, L., Wang, X., Ding, C., Tian, Z., & Zhou, R. (2015). Dopamine controls systemic inflammation through inhibition of NLRP3 inflammasome. Cell, 160(1-2), 62-73. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cell.2014.11.047
    • Yoneno, K., Hisamatsu, T., Shimamura, K., Kamada, N., Ichikawa, R., Kitazume, M. T., Mori, M., Uo, M., Namikawa, Y., Matsuoka, K., Sato, T., Koganei, K., Sugita, A., Kanai, T., & Hibi, T. (2013). TGR5 signalling inhibits the production of pro-inflammatory cytokines by in vitro differentiated inflammatory and intestinal macrophages in Crohn's disease. Immunology, 139(1), 19-29. https://doi.org/10.1111/imm 12045
    • Yu, H., Ding, X., Shang, L., Zeng, X., Liu, H., Li, N., Huang, S., Wang, Y., Wang, G., Cai, S., Chen, M., Levesque, C. L., Johnston, L. J., & Qiao, S. (2018). Protective Ability of Biogenic Antimicrobial Peptide Microcin J25 Against Enterotoxigenic Escherichia coli-Induced Intestinal Epithelial Dysfunction and Inflammatory Responses IPEC-J2 Cells. Frontiers in cellular and infection microbiology, 8, 242. https://doi.org/10.3389/fcimb.2018.00242
    • Zaiss, M. M., Joyce Wu, H. J., Mauro, D., Schett, G., & Ciccia, F. (2021). The gut-joint axis in rheumatoid arthritis. Nature reviews. Rheumatology, 17(4), 224-237. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41584-021-00585-3
    • Zhang B, Zuo F, Yu R, Zeng Z, Ma H, Chen S. Comparative genome-based identification of a cell wall-anchored protein from Lactobacillus plantarum increases adhesion of Lactococcus lactis to human epithelial cells. Sci Rep. 2015 Sep. 15; 5:14109. doi: 10.1038/srep14109. PMID: 26370773; PMCID: PMC4572922.
    • Zhang, X., Zhang, D., Jia, H., Feng, Q., Wang, D., Liang, D., Wu, X., Li, J., Tang, L., Li, Y., Lan, Z., Chen, B., Li, Y., Zhong, H., Xie, H., Jie, Z., Chen, W., Tang, S., Xu, X., Wang, X., . . . Wang, J. (2015). The oral and gut microbiomes are perturbed in rheumatoid arthritis and partly normalized after treatment. Nature medicine, 21(8), 895-905. https://doi.org/10.1038/nm.3914
    • Zhou, B., & Zhang, D. (2017). Antibacterial effects of bacteriocins isolated from Lactobacillus rhamnosus (ATCC 53103) in a rabbit model of knee implant infection. Experimental and therapeutic medicine, 15(3), 2985-2989. https://doi.org/10.3892/etm.2018.5790
  • Lengthy table referenced here
    US20230190834A1-20230622-T00001
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
  • Lengthy table referenced here
    US20230190834A1-20230622-T00002
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
  • Lengthy table referenced here
    US20230190834A1-20230622-T00003
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
  • Lengthy table referenced here
    US20230190834A1-20230622-T00004
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
  • Lengthy table referenced here
    US20230190834A1-20230622-T00005
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
  • Lengthy table referenced here
    US20230190834A1-20230622-T00006
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
  • LENGTHY TABLES
    The patent application contains a lengthy table section. A copy of the table is available in electronic form from the USPTO web site (https://seqdata.uspto.gov/?pageRequest=docDetail&DocID=US20230190834A1). An electronic copy of the table will also be available from the USPTO upon request and payment of the fee set forth in 37 CFR 1.19(b)(3).

Claims (30)

1. A method of improving immune health, comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising viable microbes, comprising:
(xvii) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus brevis;
(xviii) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial population comprising Lactococcus lactis;
(xix) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial population comprising Bacillus velenzensis; and
(xx) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial population comprising Lactobacillus harbinensis.
2. A method of improving immune health, comprising administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising:
(i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 43;
(ii) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 285;
(iii) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 284; and
(iv) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial species comprising a 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 286.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises a medical food, nutritional supplement or food stuff.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises a pharmaceutical composition.
5. The method of claim 2, wherein the composition comprises a medical food, nutritional supplement or food stuff.
6. The method of claim 2, wherein the composition comprises a pharmaceutical composition.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein the viable microbes are plant-derived or food-derived.
8. The method of claim 2, wherein the viable microbes are plant-derived or food-derived.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein improving immune health comprises reducing inflammation in the human subject.
10. A method of inhibiting inflammation in a human subject, the method comprising:
administering to a human subject an effective amount of a composition comprising:
(i) a first microbial entity comprising a first bacterial species comprising n 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to a 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 43
(ii) a second microbial entity comprising a second bacterial species comprising n 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to an 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 285;
(iii) a third microbial entity comprising a third bacterial species comprising n 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to an 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 284; and
(iv) a fourth microbial entity comprising a fourth bacterial species comprising n 16S rDNA sequence that is at least 97% identical to an 16S rDNA sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 286; wherein the human subject has lower circulating levels of at least one anti-inflammatory marker and/or higher circulating levels of at least one inflammation-associated marker; and/or wherein the method results in higher circulating levels of at least one anti-inflammatory marker and/or lower circulating levels of at least one inflammation-associated marker.
11. The method of claim 2, wherein the composition is capable of producing neurotransmitters selected from the group consisting of serotonin, gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), dopamine, acetylcholine, and combinations thereof.
12. The method of claim 2, wherein the composition is capable of modulating IFNγ, IL-12, TNF-α, IL-17, IL-6, IL-1β, IL-10 or combinations thereof in the human subject.
13. The method of claim 2, wherein at least one microbial entity comprises a first genome; wherein the first genome comprises at least one functional expression sequence at least about 30% identical to a functional expression sequence selected from Table 5 or Table 6.
14. The method of claim 2, wherein at least one microbial entity is capable of producing an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or an enzyme capable of acting on the same substrate as an enzyme having an amino acid sequence at least 60% identical to an enzyme selected from Table 5 or 6.
15. The method of claim 2, wherein at least one microbial entity comprises a genus of bacteria with a metabolic signature or functionality selected from Tables 5 or 7.
16. The method of claim 1, wherein at least one microbial entity comprises one or more features selected from the group consisting of:
(i) capable of engrafting when administered to a subject,
(ii) capable of having anti-inflammatory activity,
(iii) not capable of inducing pro-inflammatory activity,
(iv) capable of producing a secondary bile acid,
(v) capable of producing a tryptophan metabolite,
(vi) capable of restoring epithelial integrity as determined by a primary epithelial cell monolayer barrier integrity assay,
(vii) capable of being associated with remission of an inflammatory bowel disease,
(viii) capable of producing a short-chain fatty acid,
(ix) capable of inhibiting a histone deacetylase (HDAC) activity,
(x) capable of producing a medium-chain fatty acid,
(xi) capable of expressing catalase activity,
(xii) capable of having alpha-fucosidase activity,
(xiii) capable of inducing Wnt activation,
(xiv) capable of producing a B vitamin,
(xv) capable of modulating host metabolism of endocannabinoid,
(xvi) capable of producing a polyamine and/or modulating a host metabolism of a polyamine,
(xvii) capable of reducing fecal levels of a sphingolipid,
(xviii) capable of modulating host production of kynurenine and/or capable of producing kynurenine,
(xix) capable of reducing fecal calprotectin level,
(xx) not capable of activating a pattern recognition receptor (PRR) pathway, and optionally, a toll-like receptor (TLR) pathway, a NACHT, LRR, and PYD domains-containing protein 3 (NLRP3) inflammasome pathway, or a C-type lectin receptor pathway and combinations thereof,
(xxi) capable of activating a PRR pathway, and optionally a TLR pathway, a NLRP3 pathway a C-type lectin receptor pathway, and combinations thereof,
(xxii) not capable of producing ursodeoxycholic acid,
(xxiii) capable of not being associated with clinical non-remission of an inflammatory bowel disease,
(xxiv) capable of inhibiting apoptosis of intestinal epithelial cells,
(xxv) capable of inducing an increased anti-inflammatory Interleukin (IL)-10/IL-6 cytokine ratio in macrophages,
(xxvi) capable of not inducing pro-inflammatory IL-6, Tumor Necrosis Factor Alpha (TNFα), IL-1β, IL-23 or IL-12 production or gene expression in macrophages,
(xxvii) capable of downmodulating one or more genes induced in Interferon gamma (IFN-γ) treated colonic organoids,
(xxix) capable of producing IL-18,
(xxx) capable of inducing the activation of antigen presenting cells,
(xxxi) capable of reducing the expression of one or more inhibitory receptors on T cells,
(xxxii) capable of increasing expression of one or more genes/proteins associated with T cell activation and/or function,
(xxxiii) capable of enhancing the ability of CD8+ T cells to kill tumor cells,
(xxxiv) capable of enhancing the efficacy of an immune checkpoint inhibitor therapy, (xxxv) capable of reducing colonic inflammation,
(xxxvi) capable of promoting the recruitment of CD8+ T cells to tumors, and combinations thereof, and
(xxxvii) capable of producing antioxidants, and optionally, flavonoids, terpenoids, acorbate, and combinations thereof.
17. The method of claim 13, wherein the not activating a toll-like receptor pathway comprises no activation of TLR4 or TLR5, and/or wherein the activating a toll-like receptor pathway comprises activation of TLR2.
18. The method of claim 13, wherein the one or more genes induced in IFN-γ treated colonic organoids, is selected from the group consisting of genes associated with inflammatory chemokine signaling, Nuclear Factor Kappa B (NF-κB) signaling, TNF family signaling, type I interferon signaling, type II interferon signaling, TLR signaling, lymphocyte trafficking, Th17 cell differentiation, Th1 differentiation, Th2 differentiation, apoptosis, inflammasomes, autophagy, oxidative stress, major histocompatibility (MHC) class I and II antigen presentation, complement, mTor, nod-like receptor signaling, Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-Bisphosphate 3-Kinase (PI3K) signaling, and combinations thereof.
19. The method of claim 16, wherein the one or more inhibitory receptors on T cells is selected from the group consisting of T Cell Immunoreceptor With Ig And ITIM Domains (TIGIT), T-Cell Immunoglobulin Mucin Family Member 3 (TIM-3), Lymphocyte Activating 3 (LAG-3), and combinations thereof.
20. The method of claim 16, wherein the one or more genes or proteins associated with T cell activation and/or function is selected from the group consisting of CD45RO, CD69, IL-24, TNF-α, perforin, IFN-γ, and combinations thereof.
21. The method of claim 2, wherein at least one microbial entity is capable of producing (a) one or more indole-containing compounds, optionally wherein the indole-containing compound is selected from the group consisting of indole, indole acetic acid (IAA), and indole propionic acid (IPA) and/or (b) bacteriocins and/or antibacterial peptides and/or (c) a biosurfactant that reduces pro-inflammatory cytokines.
22. The method of claim 2, wherein at least one microbial entity metabolizes human produced primary bile acids into secondary bile acids, optionally wherein the primary bile acid is cholic acid, chenodeoxycholic acid, or combinations thereof, and optionally wherein the secondary bile acid inhibits FXR and/or activates TGR5.
23. The method of claim 2, wherein at least one microbial entity produces more omega-3 fatty acids compared to omega-6 fatty acids.
24. The method of claim 2, wherein at least one microbial entity comprises one or more bacteria that are capable of producing a metabolite selected from Table 5 or Table 7.
25. The method of claim 2, wherein the composition further comprises a metabolite selected from Table 5 or Table 7.
26. The method of claim 2, the composition further comprises a prebiotic fiber.
27. The method of claim 2, wherein the inhibition of inflammation in the subject is caused by the production at least one anti-inflammatory metabolite by at least one microbial entity.
28. The method of claim 2, wherein the method reduces the level and/or activity of at least one inflammatory cytokine from Table 8 relative to a level and/or activity of the inflammatory cytokine in the serum of the human subject; or a tissue of the subject, prior to administering the pharmaceutical composition, medical food, or solid food.
29. The method of claim 2, wherein the method comprises treating, preventing or reducing the severity of at least one symptom of an immune system disorder.
30. The method of claim 29, wherein the immune system disorder is selected from the group consisting of allergic rhinitis, allergic conjunctivitis, allergic bronchial asthma, atopic eczema, anaphylaxis, insect sting, drug allergy, food allergy, asthma, eczema, a disorder or condition associated with a pathological Th17 activity, and a rheumatic disease selected from spondyloarthritis, psoriasis and rheumatoid arthritis.
US17/816,932 2021-12-21 2022-08-02 Immunomodulatory compositions comprising microbial entities Pending US20230190834A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/816,932 US20230190834A1 (en) 2021-12-21 2022-08-02 Immunomodulatory compositions comprising microbial entities

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202163292362P 2021-12-21 2021-12-21
US202263348854P 2022-06-03 2022-06-03
US17/816,932 US20230190834A1 (en) 2021-12-21 2022-08-02 Immunomodulatory compositions comprising microbial entities

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20230190834A1 true US20230190834A1 (en) 2023-06-22

Family

ID=85174020

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/816,932 Pending US20230190834A1 (en) 2021-12-21 2022-08-02 Immunomodulatory compositions comprising microbial entities
US18/304,264 Pending US20230256035A1 (en) 2021-12-21 2023-04-20 Immunomodulatory compositions comprising microbial entities

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/304,264 Pending US20230256035A1 (en) 2021-12-21 2023-04-20 Immunomodulatory compositions comprising microbial entities

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (2) US20230190834A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2023122193A2 (en)

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021061991A1 (en) * 2019-09-24 2021-04-01 Prolacta Bioscience, Inc. Compositions and methods for treatment of inflammatory and immune diseases

Family Cites Families (45)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3048526A (en) 1958-08-04 1962-08-07 Wander Company Medicinal tablet
US3108046A (en) 1960-11-25 1963-10-22 Smith Kline French Lab Method of preparing high dosage sustained release tablet and product of this method
US3536809A (en) 1969-02-17 1970-10-27 Alza Corp Medication method
US3598123A (en) 1969-04-01 1971-08-10 Alza Corp Bandage for administering drugs
US3845770A (en) 1972-06-05 1974-11-05 Alza Corp Osmatic dispensing device for releasing beneficial agent
US3916899A (en) 1973-04-25 1975-11-04 Alza Corp Osmotic dispensing device with maximum and minimum sizes for the passageway
US4008719A (en) 1976-02-02 1977-02-22 Alza Corporation Osmotic system having laminar arrangement for programming delivery of active agent
US4532126A (en) 1982-05-07 1985-07-30 R. P. Scherer Corporation Masticatory soft elastic gelatin capsules and method for the manufacture thereof
US4625494A (en) 1983-04-28 1986-12-02 Pfrimmer & Co. Pharmazeutische Werke Erlangen Method and apparatus for making mixtures of pharmaceutical liquids
US4478822A (en) 1983-05-16 1984-10-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Drug delivery system utilizing thermosetting gels
IE58110B1 (en) 1984-10-30 1993-07-14 Elan Corp Plc Controlled release powder and process for its preparation
US4671953A (en) 1985-05-01 1987-06-09 University Of Utah Research Foundation Methods and compositions for noninvasive administration of sedatives, analgesics, and anesthetics
GB8601100D0 (en) 1986-01-17 1986-02-19 Cosmas Damian Ltd Drug delivery system
US4919939A (en) 1986-04-29 1990-04-24 Pharmetrix Corporation Periodontal disease treatment system
GB2189698A (en) 1986-04-30 1987-11-04 Haessle Ab Coated omeprazole tablets
US4800083A (en) 1986-10-20 1989-01-24 R. P. Scherer Corporation Sustained release method and product
ES2061623T3 (en) 1987-03-02 1994-12-16 Brocades Pharma Bv PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING A PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION AND A PHARMACEUTICAL GRANULATE.
US5073543A (en) 1988-07-21 1991-12-17 G. D. Searle & Co. Controlled release formulations of trophic factors in ganglioside-lipsome vehicle
US4935243A (en) 1988-12-19 1990-06-19 Pharmacaps, Inc. Chewable, edible soft gelatin capsule
IT1229203B (en) 1989-03-22 1991-07-25 Bioresearch Spa USE OF 5 METHYLTHETRAHYDROPHOLIC ACID, 5 FORMYLTHETRAHYDROPHOLIC ACID AND THEIR PHARMACEUTICALLY ACCEPTABLE SALTS FOR THE PREPARATION OF PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS IN THE FORM OF CONTROLLED RELEASE ACTIVE IN THE THERAPY OF MENTAL AND ORGANIC DISORDERS.
US5013726A (en) 1989-09-12 1991-05-07 Ivy Jeffery W External analgesic lotion containing active ingredients of methyl salicylate and camphor and menthol and method of making such lotion
US5120548A (en) 1989-11-07 1992-06-09 Merck & Co., Inc. Swelling modulated polymeric drug delivery device
US5225202A (en) 1991-09-30 1993-07-06 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Enteric coated pharmaceutical compositions
US5580578A (en) 1992-01-27 1996-12-03 Euro-Celtique, S.A. Controlled release formulations coated with aqueous dispersions of acrylic polymers
US5591767A (en) 1993-01-25 1997-01-07 Pharmetrix Corporation Liquid reservoir transdermal patch for the administration of ketorolac
CA2181048C (en) 1994-01-14 2003-05-06 Lee Shahinian, Jr. A method for sustained and extended corneal analgesia
IT1270594B (en) 1994-07-07 1997-05-07 Recordati Chem Pharm CONTROLLED RELEASE PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION OF LIQUID SUSPENSION MOGUISTEIN
US5733575A (en) 1994-10-07 1998-03-31 Bpsi Holdings, Inc. Enteric film coating compositions, method of coating therewith, and coated forms
US5871776A (en) 1995-01-31 1999-02-16 Mehta; Atul M. Controlled-release nifedipine
DK0770397T3 (en) 1995-10-18 2004-08-09 Akzo Nobel Nv Newcastle disease virus combination vaccine
US5837284A (en) 1995-12-04 1998-11-17 Mehta; Atul M. Delivery of multiple doses of medications
IL127378A (en) 1996-06-06 2003-07-31 Bifodan As Enteric coating for an oral preparation
US5861174A (en) 1996-07-12 1999-01-19 University Technology Corporation Temperature sensitive gel for sustained delivery of protein drugs
UA73092C2 (en) 1998-07-17 2005-06-15 Брістол-Майерс Сквібб Компані Tablets with enteric coating and method for their manufacture
US6139875A (en) 1998-09-29 2000-10-31 Eastman Chemical Company Aqueous enteric coating composition and low gastric permeability enteric coating
US6572871B1 (en) 1999-01-06 2003-06-03 W. Edward Church Pain treatment method and apparatus using heating wrap and analgesic cream
US6258380B1 (en) 1999-03-05 2001-07-10 Banner Pharmacaps, Inc. Chewable soft capsule
JP4273277B2 (en) 1999-06-30 2009-06-03 大塚製薬株式会社 Oligosaccharide supplement composition
US6420473B1 (en) 2000-02-10 2002-07-16 Bpsi Holdings, Inc. Acrylic enteric coating compositions
US20040213828A1 (en) 2003-04-23 2004-10-28 Smith David J. Pain relief lollipop compositions and methods
GB0322358D0 (en) 2003-09-24 2003-10-22 Bioprogress Technology Ltd Improvements in powder compaction and enrobing
GB201609811D0 (en) * 2016-06-05 2016-07-20 Snipr Technologies Ltd Methods, cells, systems, arrays, RNA and kits
CA3088630A1 (en) * 2017-12-15 2019-06-20 Solarea Bio, Inc. Microbial compositions and methods for treating type 2 diabetes, obesity, and metabolic syndrome
EP3846830A4 (en) * 2018-09-05 2022-07-06 Solarea Bio, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating musculoskeletal diseases
WO2020257722A2 (en) * 2019-06-19 2020-12-24 Solarea Bio, Inc. Microbial compositions and methods for producing upgraded probiotic assemblages

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021061991A1 (en) * 2019-09-24 2021-04-01 Prolacta Bioscience, Inc. Compositions and methods for treatment of inflammatory and immune diseases

Non-Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Adeniji, A.A. et al. "Bacillus velezensis: phylogeny, useful applications, and avenues for exploitation." Appl Microbiol Biotechnol vol. 103, 3669–3682. 25 Mar 2019. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00253‐019‐09710‐5 (Year: 2019) *
Farag, Mohamed A et al. "The Many Faces of Kefir Fermented Dairy Products: Quality Characteristics, Flavour Chemistry, Nutritional Value, Health Benefits, and Safety." Nutrients vol. 12,2 346. 28 Jan 2020, doi:10.3390/nu12020346 (Year: 2020) *
Medeot et al., "Bacillus velezensis strain MEP218 chromosome, complete genome," GenBank, Accession Number: CP042864.2,12 Aug 2019 (Year: 2019) *
Peluzlo et al., "Kefir and Intestinal Microbiota Modulation: Implications in Human Health", Frontiers in Nutrition, Volume 8, Feb 2021 (Year: 2021) *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20230256035A1 (en) 2023-08-17
WO2023122193A3 (en) 2023-10-05
WO2023122193A2 (en) 2023-06-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Mohajeri et al. The role of the microbiome for human health: from basic science to clinical applications
US20220395521A1 (en) Microbiome regulators and related uses thereof
Yan et al. A ropy exopolysaccharide producing strain Bifidobacterium longum subsp. longum YS108R alleviates DSS-induced colitis by maintenance of the mucosal barrier and gut microbiota modulation
Tamanai-Shacoori et al. Roseburia spp.: a marker of health?
Liu et al. Modulation of gut microbiota–brain axis by probiotics, prebiotics, and diet
Andersson et al. Probiotics lower plasma glucose in the high-fat fed C57BL/6J mouse
JP2021001208A (en) Glycan therapeutics and related methods thereof
Stephani et al. Gut microbiota, probiotics and inflammatory bowel disease
US20160120915A1 (en) Methods for manipulating immune responses by altering microbiota
ES2683190T3 (en) Probiotic for excessive childhood crying
WO2020257722A2 (en) Microbial compositions and methods for producing upgraded probiotic assemblages
Qi et al. New insights into the role of oral microbiota dysbiosis in the pathogenesis of inflammatory bowel disease
WO2017160944A2 (en) Compositions and methods for treating and preventing graft versus host disease
CA3111795A1 (en) Methods and compositions for treating musculoskeletal diseases
US11653689B2 (en) Probiotic Bifidobacterium breve strain and compositions comprising said strain
US20230190834A1 (en) Immunomodulatory compositions comprising microbial entities
WO2022192854A1 (en) Methods to induce biopterin and related metabolites
Overstreet et al. The role of the microbiota in gastrointestinal health and disease
Negm MASTERARBEIT/MASTER’S THESIS
Lami et al. Gut-brain axis and immunoneuroendocrine modulation in neurological and psychiatric disorders: A systematic review
JP2024518084A (en) Compositions and methods for treating disease
US20230172996A1 (en) Composition for alleviating pulmonary hypertension, method for predicting prognosis of pulmonary hypertension, method for assisting in determining severity of pulmonary hypertension, and method for assisting in diagnosing pulmonary hypertension
EP4341382A1 (en) Compositions and methods for treating disease
Florio et al. Discovering the Nutrition-Microbiota Interplay in Inflammatory Bowel Disease: Are We There Yet?
Leung et al. Yee Kwan Chan1, Manreetpal Singh Brar2, Pirkka V. Kirjavainen3, Yan Chen4, Jiao Peng4, Daxu Li4

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: SOLAREA BIO, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:SCHOTT, ERIC MICHAEL;TOLEDO, GERARDO V.;SOTO-GIRON, MARIA JULIANA;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20220818 TO 20221118;REEL/FRAME:062284/0500

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED